JP6894113B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a rotating body type gaming machine and a ball gaming machine.

Conventionally, a slot machine, which is a spinning-type gaming machine, has a main control unit that controls the game and a predetermined effect for enhancing the interest of the player according to the progress of the game based on the information transmitted from the main control unit. The game is started when a specified number of medals are inserted into the medal slot, and when the start switch is operated, the winning combination lottery provided in the main control unit is provided. By means, one of a re-gaming combination that can be played without inserting a medal, a plurality of winning combinations, and a combination lottery result including a loss is selected, and a stop switch provided corresponding to each of the plurality of rotating reels. Based on the operation, the main control unit controls each rotating reel to stop in a display mode corresponding to the winning combination lottery result selected by the winning combination lottery means, and the combination mode of the symbols of each rotating reel that has stopped rotating is re-combined. Judgment as to whether or not it is a game combination or a winning combination is performed, and if the determination result corresponds to the winning combination, the player is given a preset number of medals according to the winning combination as a winning combination, and 1 The game ends. If a loss is selected by the role lottery means, the game ends without paying out medals. In such slot machines, fraudulent acts are often carried out for the purpose of winning more medals, and various measures are taken against the fraudulent acts.

Specifically, as described in Patent Document 1, if a display consisting of a 7-segment display for displaying predetermined information is provided on each of the main control board and the sub control board, and the sub control board is illegally replaced. , The display consisting of the 7-segment display on the main control board side and the display consisting of the 7-segment display on the sub-control board side are different, which makes it possible to easily grasp the unauthorized replacement of the sub-control board. What to do is proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-227090 (Summary)

However, as shown in FIG. 75, by mounting the display 501 composed of the 7-segment display on the main control board 500, the lower surface of the display opposite to the display surface on which the 7-segment display of the display 501 is arranged is mounted. There is a possibility that a new fraudulent act may be performed, such as illegally hiding the IC502 or the like, which is an illegal component, in the gap immediately below the unit, and transmitting a command from the IC502 to the CPU or the like mounted on the main control board. At this time, when the display 501 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 75, the 4-digit 7-segment display is mounted on the main control board as one component, so that the illegal IC 502 has 4 digits. It is hidden behind the 7-segment display (display 501) and cannot be seen from the outside, which makes it difficult to detect an illegal IC 502.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to easily find an illegal component such as an illegal IC mounted hidden between a main game board and a display component in a gaming machine. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game on one side of the gaming machine, and is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. includes a main control substrate accommodated in the substrate case and a plurality of display parts for displaying the numeric and / or character, the plurality of display parts are arranged on one side of the main control board A gap is provided between at least one set of adjacent display components among the plurality of display components, and connection terminals of the plurality of display components are connected to a wiring pattern provided on the main control board. The connection terminals of the at least one set of display components provided with the gap are arranged on the gap side .

According to this configuration, since a gap is provided between at least one set of adjacent display components among the plurality of display components arranged side by side on one side of the main control board, the gap between the adjacent display components is provided. Unauthorized components can be seen through one side of the main control board and hidden between one side of the main control board and the opposite surface of at least one set of display components provided with a gap to the one side. Even if it is installed, fraudulent parts can be easily found.

Further, the connection terminals of the plurality of display components are connected to the wiring pattern provided on the main control board, and the connection terminals of the at least one set of display components provided with the gap are arranged on the gap side. It should be done.

According to this configuration, among the connection terminals of a plurality of display components connected to the wiring pattern of the main control board, the connection terminals of at least one set of display components provided with a gap are arranged on the gap side to form the main. Even if an attempt is made to conceal an illegal component between one surface of the control board and the opposite surface of at least one set of display components provided with a gap to the one surface, the connection terminals arranged on the gap side are still present. It is possible to prevent the illegal parts from being mounted because it is an obstacle and the illegal parts cannot be mounted.

Further, the at least one set of display components provided with the gap may be arranged parallel to one surface of the main control board and offset in a direction not widening the gap. According to this configuration, when an unauthorized component is to be mounted in a hidden space between one surface of the main control board and the opposite surface of at least one set of display components provided with a gap to the one surface, it is hidden. Since the size of the space can be smaller than the vertical or horizontal dimension of the fraudulent part, even if the fraudulent part is placed in the hidden space, part of the fraudulent part will protrude from the hidden space, making it very easy to find the fraudulent part. ..

Further, it is preferable to further provide a blocking member for preventing the insertion of foreign matter into the gap. According to this configuration, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into a gap between adjacent display parts from the outside for the purpose of performing some kind of fraud, the blocking member can prevent the foreign substance from being inserted into the gap, which is a fraudulent act. Can be prevented.

Further, the blocking member is a transparent one that covers the side portion and the upper portion of the gap, and it is preferable that the transparent blocking member or the upper position of the gap of the substrate case is processed with a convex lens. According to this configuration, since the above-mentioned gap can be magnified and visually recognized through the blocking member or the convex lens processed portion of the substrate case, one surface of the main control board and at least one set of display components provided with the gap can be seen. Even if an illegal part is mounted between the facing surface and the direction, the illegal part can be easily found.

Further, the wiring pattern is provided on the other surface side opposite to one surface of the main control board, and a connection portion between the connection terminal and the wiring pattern on the other surface side opposite to one surface of the main control board. It is preferable that a cover is provided to cover the above. According to this configuration, even if an unauthorized member such as a wire is attempted to access the connection terminal of the display component connected to the wiring pattern on the other side of the main control board from the outside for an unauthorized purpose, the cover connects to the connection terminal. It cannot be accessed, and fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Further, at least one connector and an electronic component whose height from one surface of the main control board is lower than that of the display component are arranged on one surface of the main control board. At least one connector opening is formed in which the one connector is exposed to the outside of the board case, the electronic component is arranged between the main control means and the one connector, and the display component is a display component. It is preferable that the electronic component is arranged between the electronic component and the one connector.

According to this configuration, by accommodating the display component in a sealed board case so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the display component, and it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the display component. When an illegal member is inserted to perform an illegal act against the main control means, it is necessary to allow the illegal member to get over the display component arranged between the connector opening and the main control means. Since it is not possible to use a low-height component, it is not easy to insert a fraudulent member so as to get over the display component to reach the main control means, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts on the main control means.

Further, on one surface of the main control board, a first wiring for the first power supply and a second wiring for the second power supply having a polarity different from that of the first power supply are laid, and the display surface of the display component is laid. At least the second wiring may not be laid on the opposite surface side.

According to this configuration, even if an unauthorized component such as an unauthorized IC is concealed and mounted between one surface of the main control board and the surface of at least one set of display components provided with a gap facing the one surface. Unlike the light emitting diode, the operation of the IC or the like requires the supply of both the first power supply and the second power supply. Therefore, the power supply wiring cannot be completed in an area that cannot be visually recognized from the outside, and a part of the wiring extending from the illegally hidden IC or the like to the second wiring can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the display parts. It can be done, and hidden fraudulent parts can be easily found.

Further, a plurality of first terminals for handling signals directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium are arranged on one surface of the main control board, and one surface of the main control board is provided with a plurality of first terminals. , The first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal closest to the display component among the plurality of first terminals arranged on one surface and each display component, or the display component. It is preferable that an electronic component on which the first terminal is not arranged is mounted on the side.

According to this configuration, even if an unauthorized component such as an unauthorized IC is concealed and mounted between one surface of the main control board and the opposite surface of at least one set of display components provided with a gap to the one surface. In order to connect to the 1st terminal from an illegal part and obtain an unfair profit, avoid the part where the 1st terminal is not arranged or the 1st terminal is not arranged on the display component side, and the illegal part and the 1st Since it is necessary to connect the terminals, the part of the wiring extending from the illegal part to the first terminal that can be seen from the outside becomes long, and this wiring can be easily seen from the outside, which makes it easy to find the illegal part. Become.

It is a perspective view of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine (slot machine) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of the reel of the rotary body type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the rotary body type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. It is an external view which shows the arrangement state of the main control board of FIG. It is the schematic of the main control board of FIG. It is a schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of FIG. It is a functional block diagram which shows the function of the main control board and the sub control board of FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the combination of the 1st Embodiment and a reel symbol, and the number of medals to be paid out. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the combination lottery result of 1st Embodiment, and a command. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage content of the game information storage means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the 7-segment display of 1st Embodiment and the display data of 1 byte (8 bits). It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment, (a) is the lighting of each dot of the ratio indicator, the tens digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit, and the abnormal normal state of game inspection information. It is a figure which shows the relationship, (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display content of the ratio indicator according to a game situation. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method about the error of the payout indicator in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RWM backup failure determination process (step S3) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process (step S4) at the time of power-on of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (step S7) of FIG. The error processing of FIG. 17 (step S9), the error processing of FIG. 24 (step S233), the error processing of FIG. 25 (step S254), the error processing of FIG. 31 (step S411), and the error processing of FIG. 32 (step S441). It is a flowchart which shows. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the overflow error determination process (step S201) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reel error determination process (step S208) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game information aggregation processing (step S211) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 400 update process (step S271, S273, S276) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process (step S278, S280) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, S287) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the cumulative update process (step S289, S290, S291) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (step S212) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-cutting process (step S434) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output processing (step S446) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process (step S437) for external use area of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the door monitoring process (step S533) of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display-related timer update process (step S534) of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio calculation (step S535) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43. It is a flowchart which shows 100 times processing (step S702) of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows the shift process (step S708, S709) of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process (step S711) of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display data acquisition (step S773) of FIG. 48. It is a flowchart which shows the display data acquisition process (step S809, S810) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-error notification processing of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the ratio calculation process performed by the calculation means of FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship with the display of the ratio indicator, the display of the payout indicator, and the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display of the ratio indicator, the display of the payout indicator, and other relations with the state of a main CPU which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display of the ratio indicator, the display of the payout indicator, and still other relations with the state of a main CPU which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in the modification of 1st Embodiment. 5 is a schematic view of a cross section taken along the line AA of the main control board of FIG. 5, and a comparative example of a conventional example and the first embodiment when an unauthorized member is inserted. It is a more detailed schematic diagram of the main control board of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. 65, and a comparative example of the wiring of the main control board of the first embodiment, and the conventional example when an illegal IC is mounted. It is the schematic of the modification of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. 65. It is a schematic diagram in the modified example of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. 65, and is a comparative example of the wiring of the main control board in the conventional example when an illegal IC is mounted and the modified example of the first embodiment. It is the schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of 4th Embodiment. It is the bottom view which looked at the main control board of 5th Embodiment from the back side. It is explanatory drawing explaining the memory content of the game information storage means of FIG. 7 in the ball game machine (pachinko game machine) which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio indicator in 6th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a part of the conventional example.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a slot machine), which is a gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 68.

(Constitution)
The outline of the configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front opening of the housing 3 is closed by the front door 5 so as to be openable and closable, and the operation plate 7 is arranged at a position substantially at the center height of the front door 5. A front plate 9 is arranged above the door. A horizontally long rectangular display window 11 is provided on the front plate 9, and inside the display window 11, as shown in FIG. 4, a rotary reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a predetermined order is formed. Left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are arranged. The left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R form a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. Each forms one variable display sequence.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have a plurality of types of symbols including, for example, "7", "BAR", "Bell", "Cherry", "R1", and "R2". A total of 21 pieces are provided in a predetermined arrangement. Note that FIG. 2 shows only the reel symbols necessary for the description of the present embodiment for the sake of simplicity.

Further, each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is individually assigned a frame number from 0 to 20, for example, a symbol from frame number 0 to 20 is printed. The reel tape is attached to the peripheral surface of the reel to form the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively. When the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate, a plurality of symbols of frame numbers 20, 19, ..., 0, 20, ... Are displayed on the display window 11 in a predetermined order. Variable display.

Then, when the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is stopped, a total of 9 symbols can be seen from the display window 11 with 3 for each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. Specifically, three reels, one for each of the upper, middle, and lower reels, and a total of nine reels for the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are displayed through the display window 11. That is, when all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped, a total of nine symbols arranged in three columns and three rows are stopped and displayed on the display window 11, and the upper and middle rows are displayed. If one of the three horizontal rows and two diagonal rows in the lower row becomes the winning line, which will be described later, and the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop with the winning combination symbols aligned on the winning line. It will be a prize.

Here, as shown in FIG. 3, left / middle / right reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R, each of which is composed of a stepping motor, are connected to the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, respectively, and left. -The middle and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are rotationally driven independently.

Further, returning to FIG. 1, the operation board 7 has a bet switch 15 for instructing the insertion of medals one by one from the credit medals stored inside, and a specified number of medals per game (game) from the credit medals. Maximum bet switch 17 for instructing the maximum number of medals to be inserted (set to 3), lever-shaped start switch 19 for rotating each reel 13L, 13M, 13R to start variable display of each symbol. Left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R corresponding to each of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R in order to stop the rotation of each symbol and stop the variable display of each symbol. Switches 21L, 21M, 21R, a settlement switch 23 for paying out credit medals, and a medal insertion slot 25 are provided. In this embodiment, it is assumed that one type of three medals is set as the number of medals inserted (specified number of medals) required for one game.

In addition, in the center of the upper part of the front plate 9, a moving image or the like is displayed to notify the player of winning or winning, or the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R necessary for winning a prize. A liquid crystal display 27 for performing an effect of notifying an operation mode is provided, and an explanation panel 29 on which various winning symbols are displayed is provided immediately above the liquid crystal display 27, and the liquid crystal display 27 and Speakers 31L and 31R are provided on the left and right sides of the explanation panel 29, respectively, for producing effects such as music and voice. Speakers 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout outlet 39, which will be described later.

Further, a central lamp portion 33M is arranged on the upper side of the explanation panel 29 and the speakers 31L and 31R, and left and right lamp portions 33L and 33R are arranged on the left and right sides thereof, respectively. Light sources such as light emitting diodes are arranged in the center, left, and right lamp portions 33M, 33L, and 33R, respectively. These center, left, and right lamp portions 33M, 33L, and 33R are integrally formed, and constitute an upper lamp portion 33 for performing an effect such as notifying the player of winning or winning.

Further, a lower panel 35 on which a decorative image or the like is displayed is provided below the operation plate 7, and on the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, for example, a lower lamp portion in which a plurality of light sources are arranged side by side in two rows is provided. 37L and 37R are provided. Further, below the lower panel 35, a medal payout outlet 39 and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals to be paid out from the medal payout outlet 39 are provided. Further, a winning line is drawn on the front plate 9, and a credit display for displaying the number of stored credit medals is displayed in the lower left corner of the front plate 9 under display control by the CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. A device 45 and a payout display 46 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out are arranged. The credit display 45 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and can display a two-digit stored number (up to 50). Further, the payout display 46 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and can display a two-digit payout number. The 7-segment display is formed in a rod shape and has a total of eight segments in which seven segments arranged in a "8" shape and one small round segment serving as a decimal point are combined. Yes, each segment is composed of light emitting diodes (see FIG. 11). Here, the payout indicator 46 is also used to display an error code corresponding to the error that has occurred, and the dots of the tens digit, the ones digit, or both of the payout indicators 46 (the place where the lamp can be lit in FIG. 11 DP) are It is also used as an advantageous section lamp 47 (see FIG. 3), and lighting indicates that it is an advantageous section, and extinguishing indicates that it is not an advantageous section. The advantageous section lamp may be configured as a separate component from the payout indicator 46. For example, the dot portion of the credit indicator 45 may be used, or another lamp member may be used.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 4, the support frame 13 supporting the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is fixed to the rear wall in the housing 3. Below the support frame 13 in the housing 3, a hopper unit 43 for discharging medals to the medal payout outlet 39 is arranged. Further, on the back side near the medal insertion slot 25, as shown in FIG. 4, it is selected whether or not the medals inserted in the medal insertion slot 25 are genuine, and only the regular medals are placed in the hopper unit 43. A guiding medal selector 48 is arranged. A medal passage (not shown) is provided inside the housing 3, and medals excluded as non-regular medals in the medal selector 48 and medals paid out from the hopper unit 43 pass through this medal passage. It is paid out from the medal payment exit 39. Specifically, although not particularly shown, the medal selector 48 stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 in the hopper unit 43 by operating the rail portion by driving a cancel coil using an electromagnet. It is possible to switch between the passage and the passage leading from the medal payout exit 39 to the medal receiver 41. As a result, it is possible to switch between storing the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 as credit medals and paying them out to the medal receiver 41. However, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum number of stored medals or during the game, the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout outlet 39 without operating the rail portion by driving the cancel coil. In cases other than these, the rail portion is operated by the drive of the cancel coil that receives the drive control by the main CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. 3, and the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is a regular one. Only regular medals are led to the hopper unit 43 by selecting whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 3, the insertion sensor 53 is provided in the medal selector 48 portion near the medal insertion slot 25 inside the housing 3, and the insertion sensor 53 detects the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 one by one. .. The insertion sensor 53 is formed by providing a selector sensor A, a selector sensor B, and a selector sensor C in the passage of medals, and the inserted medals are placed in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B. And, it is arranged so as to detect at intervals (timing) of a predetermined range of time. A payout sensor 54 is provided at the outlet of the hopper unit 43, and the payout sensor 54 detects medals to be paid out to the medal payout outlet 39 one by one. Two of the payout sensor 54, the payout sensor A and the payout sensor B, are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other. In the timing chart when the medal is passed in the normal state, both payout sensors A and B can be switched to the on state when the hopper motor 57 is being driven (on state). Further, the payout sensor B is set to shift from the off state to the on state twice, and when the payout sensor B is turned on for the first time, the payout sensor A shifts from the off state to the on state, and the payout sensor B shifts to the on state. The payout sensor A is set to shift from the on state to the off state when B is turned on for the second time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, an operation box 50 is provided, and a power switch 50a for switching the power ON / OFF, a key cylinder type setting change key switch 50b, and a push button type setting change button 50c are provided. ing. To change the setting, the setting value of the winning probability (set from setting 1) used when selecting any one of a plurality of lottery tables 671 (see FIG. 7) having different advantages during the winning combination lottery. This is a process for setting 6).

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a set value display 56 is provided, and the set value display 56 is composed of, for example, one 7-segment display, and a set value of a one-digit winning probability (specifically, a set value of a winning probability). , 1 to 6 steps) are displayed. The 7-segment display is formed in a rod shape and has a total of eight segments in which seven segments arranged in a "8" shape and one small round segment serving as a decimal point are combined. Yes, each segment is composed of light emitting diodes (see FIG. 11). Although the set value of the slot machine 1 is displayed on the set value display 56, it is provided inside the housing 3, specifically, on the back surface of the front door 5 so that the set value of the slot machine 1 cannot be seen from the outside. After setting the set value, the display is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a door sensor (door open / close switch) 58 is provided, and the door sensor 58 is installed on the housing 3 side, and whether or not the front door 5 is closed. It is a sensor for detecting the door. For example, when the front door 5 is closed, the door sensor 58 is turned on (ON state) by the contact sensor when the back surface of the front door 5 and the front surface of the door sensor 58 are close to each other, and the front door 5 is turned on. As the door opens, the back surface of the front door 5 separates from the front surface of the door sensor 58 and is turned off (OFF state) by the contact sensor. Of course, the present invention is not limited to the contact sensor, and the opening / closing of the front door 5 may be detected by an optical sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R for detecting the rotation positions of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are provided, and left / middle / right The position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R are, for example, composed of photo interrupters for detecting protrusions provided on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively, and when the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate. , The protrusion is detected every one turn, and the detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63. In the present embodiment, for example, when the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R detect the protrusions, the symbol of frame number 20 is configured to be located in the middle of the display window 11.

The hopper motor 57 shown in FIG. 3 is arranged in the hopper unit 43, and is driven by the hopper motor 57 to pay out medals toward the medal payout outlet 39. Further, the overflow sensor 57a is provided in the vicinity of the auxiliary tank for storing the medals overflowing from the medal tank for storing the medals of the hopper unit 43, and detects that the medals in the auxiliary tank are full and is the main. A signal is output to the main CPU 61 of the control board 63.

Further, an external centralized terminal plate 59 is provided inside the housing 3. The external centralized terminal board 59 outputs game data to the outside of the slot machine 1, and is wired to a connection terminal (connector) wired to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and an external device (not shown). A terminal board provided with a connection terminal (connector). Although not shown, the external centralized terminal board 59 is connected to a game island facility (for example, a data display) or a hall computer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 63 on which the main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted, and the effect control according to the progress of the game are performed based on the information transmitted from the main control board 63. A sub control board 73 on which the sub CPU 71 is mounted is provided separately, and various data are transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 in one direction. The main control board 63 is housed in a board case so that it cannot be accessed illegally from the outside, and is tightly sealed so that the board case cannot be opened without leaving a trace. There is. In addition, various measures have been taken on the board case so that it can be reliably visually recognized that the board case has been opened illegally.

The RWM (read / write memory) 65 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61, and temporarily stores data related to the game such as the game state of the slot machine 1. Further, the ROM 67 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61, and stores a game machine program (a program for the slot machine 1) including preset data.

By the way, the ROM 67 has a capacity of, for example, 16 KB (kilobytes), and the 7.5 KB area (program area 4.5 KB + data area 3 KB) starting from the address 0000H is a program related to the progress of the game and various tables 671, 672. Used to store the required data. Further, as will be described in detail later, the total number of medals paid out for each 400 games in the area of 4.35KB out of the remaining 8.5KB starting with the address 1E50H of ROM67 in order to monitor the medal payout history. It is used to store the monitoring program and data of game information such as the total number of medals paid out for the last 6000 games, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after clearing RWM.

The RWM65 has a capacity of 1024B (bytes), and the region of 512B starting with the address F000H is used to temporarily store various data necessary for executing a program related to the progress of the game. Further, as will be described in detail later, in order to monitor the game history of medals in the unused area of the remaining 512B starting with the address F200H of RWM65, the latest 15 sets of the total number of medals paid out for each 400 games. Various data (see FIG. 10) related to game information such as the total number of medals paid out for 6000 games, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after clearing RWM, etc. are stored.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 composed of four display components is provided on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 (component mounting surface of the main control board 63). Has been done. As shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63 in the board case installed at the upper positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R inside the housing 3. Then, when the front door 5 is opened, the front door 5 is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized from the outside. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the ratio display 69 is composed of four 7-segment displays Sd which are display components, and the 7-segment displays Sd are formed in a rod shape and arranged in a "8" shape. It has a total of eight segments in which the seven segments formed above and one small round segment serving as a decimal point are combined, and each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 11). Switch control is performed by the main CPU 61 to control the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting diode, and VDD and GND are supplied to at least one of the anode and cathode of the light emitting diode via the switch. In FIG. 5, CS is a transparent resin substrate case containing the main control substrate 63, K is a caulking portion for sealing the substrate case CS, and CN is a connector. Details of the arrangement of parts (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) in FIG. 5 will be described later.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 6, in each of the 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69, adjacent 7-segment displays Sd are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals, and the main 7-segment displays Sd are located between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. A gap Gp is provided so that one side 63A of the control board 63 can be seen through. By providing the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd in this way, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the one side 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) Even if an illegal component Wc (one-dot chain line in FIG. 6) that causes a slot machine such as an illegal IC to perform an illegal game operation is mounted between the two, one side 63A side of the main control board 63 is passed through the gap Gp. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the fraudulent component Wc such as the fraudulent IC hidden on the lower surface of the ratio display 69, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent component Wc from being mounted. Of the four 7-segment displays Sd, a gap Gp may be provided between at least one set of adjacent 7-segment displays Sd, and it is not always necessary to provide a gap Gp between all the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. ..

Further, the connection terminal T of each 7-segment display Sd is solder-connected to the wiring pattern formed on the other side opposite to one side 63A of the main control board 63, but the T connection terminal T of each 7-segment display Sd is connected. Is preferably arranged on the side surface on the gap Gp side as shown in FIG. In this case, the connection terminal T of the 7-segment display Sd becomes an obstacle, and the one side 63A of the main control board 63 and the one side 63A of the ratio display 69 composed of the four 7-segment displays Sd face each other ( It is not possible to mount an illegal component such as an illegal IC between the lower surface of the ratio display 69), and it is possible to reliably prevent the illegal component from being mounted on the lower surface side of the ratio indicator 69.

Further, returning to FIG. 3, the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 described above has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and by executing the game machine program stored in the ROM 67, the game progresses. Perform processing. Then, the main CPU 61 includes data related to the winning combination lottery result in the lottery process by the winning combination lottery means 103, which will be described later, data related to the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the start switch 19, etc. operated by the player. Various data of the above are transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) in the form of a command.

The sub-control board 73 includes a memory 75 having an RWM unit that temporarily stores various data and a ROM unit that stores various programs for production and the like. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and the sub CPU 71 has various data related to the slot machine 1 transmitted from the main CPU 61 (in the lottery process by the combination lottery means 103 described later). By executing the program stored in the memory 75 based on the result of the lottery, whether the operating instruments such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, and the start switch 19 have been operated), the game is played. Determine the content of the production related to the game to be provided to the person. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 controls the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 27 and the speakers 31L and 31R via the I / O port of the sub control board 73 based on the determined content of the effect. I do.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 63 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 63 has various functions realized by executing the program stored in the ROM 67 and various functions realized by controlling the hardware. ..

(1) Game control means 100
The game control means 100 of FIG. 7 controls the game of the slot machine 1 and executes a normal game which is a general game and a special game which is a game more advantageous to the player than the normal game. As shown in the above, the operation mode determining means 100a and the game state setting means 100b are provided.

a) Operation mode determination means 100a
The operation mode determining means 100a of FIG. 7 determines whether or not the player operates the slot machine 1 and modes such as long pressing. Specifically, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, and the left. Various operations on the slot machine 1 by the player, such as a mode of operation by the player for various switches such as the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R, and a mode of operation of the player to insert medals into the medal insertion slot 25. To determine the aspect of.

b) Game state setting means 100b
The game state setting means 100b of FIG. 7 is a symbol determination means for displaying the results of the lottery process by the combination lottery means 103, which will be described later, and the symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R displayed on the display window 11. The gaming state of the slot machine 1 is set to any one of a plurality of preset gaming states based on the determination result by 109 or the like.

Specifically, in the normal game state in which the normal game is executed, a prize is won in a predetermined special role (BB, CB) (if "7-7-7" is aligned on the winning line, a BB prize is won and "" on the winning line. When "BAR-BAR-BAR" is aligned, the CB prize is won), the game state setting means 100b sets the game state of the slot machine 1 to the special game state in which the special game is executed. Then, in the special game state, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of games (games) are executed and the special game end condition is satisfied, the special game is ended and the slot machine is used. The game state of 1 is set to the normal game state by the game state setting means 100b.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the special role is won but the special role is not won, that is, each symbol corresponding to the special role is set in one line in the middle of the display window 11. If the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R do not stop as displayed on the line (center line), the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is the internal winning during the internal winning. The medium gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means 100b. Further, in the game state during the internal winning, the game state of the slot machine 1 is set to the special game state by the game state setting means 100b by winning a special role carried over internally without winning a prize.

Here, the outline of the game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is configured to execute the game by inserting three medals, and the insertion sensor 53, the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 is used to insert three medals into the slot machine 1. When the input is detected, the winning line (center line) in the middle of the display window 11 becomes effective. Then, when the operation of the start switch 19 is detected on condition that a predetermined number of three medals are inserted, any of the preset winning combination lottery results is obtained by the lottery process using random numbers, which will be described later. Determined by 103. In addition, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are started, and the patterns of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R displayed on the display window 11 are changed to the left / middle / right reels 13L, Discrimination is started according to the rotation angles of 13M and 13R.

After that, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are accelerated, and the operations of all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are effectively accepted. After all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are in the enabled state, for example, when it is detected that the left stop switch 21L has been operated, the left reel 13L is stopped and the middle stop switch 21M is operated. When it is detected that the operation has been performed, the middle reel 13M is stopped, and when it is detected that the right stop switch 21R has been operated, the right reel 13R is stopped. In this way, by operating the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R corresponding to the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is stopped. To do.

Then, when all the operations of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are completed, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped. At this time, when the predetermined winning combination symbol determined by the combination lottery means 103 stops at a predetermined position on the winning line in the middle of the valid display window 11, a prize is won, and the number of medals according to the winning mode is obtained. However, one game ends when it is credited or paid out from the medal payout exit 39. In addition, a predetermined profit may be given to the player in place of the payout of the medal or at the same time as the payout of the medal.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the roles include a special role (bonus: BB, CB), a small role (middle bell, one piece role 1-12, middle cherry), and a replay role (replay 1-8). Is preset. In this embodiment, as a result of the combination lottery, it is possible to arrange different combinations (“middle bell”, “single role 1” to “single role 12”, “replay 1” to “replay 8”) depending on the operation mode. There is a possibility of winning multiple winnings (winning group: left bell, middle bell, right bell, replay). The role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 includes a special role winning (bonus winning), a small role winning, a replay winning role (replay winning), and a loss.

In addition, the prizes include a special role prize (bonus prize) related to the transition to a special game (bonus game), a small role prize related to the payout of medals, and a replay role prize related to the execution of the replay (replay) (replay). Replay prize).

Then, for example, when three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the winning line in each display mode related to the winning combination "BB" and "CB" in FIG. 8, a special winning combination is awarded. , Bonus game (special game) is executed.

In this embodiment, the medals are not paid out by winning the special role (the prescribed number of payouts of the special role is 0), and the game is configured to shift to the bonus game after the game in which the winning mode related to the special role is established. However, a predetermined number of cards (for example, 10 cards) may be set as a special role, and the game may be shifted to the bonus game after the medals are paid out.

Further, for example, the symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are displayed in each display mode related to the roles "middle bell", "single combination 1" to "single combination 12", and "middle cherry" in FIG. When three medals are lined up on the winning line in the middle of the display window 11, a small winning combination is awarded and the number of medals shown in the "number of payouts" column is paid out.

Further, as the "any" used as the display mode related to the winning of the winning combination "middle cherry" in FIG. 8, any symbol provided on the middle reel 13M and the right reel 13R may be arranged on the winning line. It means that.

In addition, if three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the winning line in the display mode related to the roles "Replay 1" to "Replay 8" in FIG. , You can play the game again under the same conditions as the previous game without inserting a new medal.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 103 is configured so that a plurality of winning combination can be won at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, a winning combination group (combination lottery result) composed of a plurality of combinations is formed, and whether or not each winning combination group is won is drawn by the combination lottery means 103. Of each winning combination group, the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" (hereinafter, the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" are collectively referred to as "bell group". In addition, each of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" may be referred to as "specific set winning"), and each of the winning combination is included. Specifically, the winning combination group "left bell" is composed of "middle bell", "single role 1" to "single role 4", and the winning combination group "middle bell" is "middle bell" "one". It is composed of "single combination 5" to "single combination 8", and the winning combination group "right bell" is composed of "middle bell", "single combination 9" to "single combination 12".

Therefore, if it is determined by the role lottery means 103 described later that the winning combination group "left bell" has been won, it means that the "middle bell", "single role 1" to "single role 4" have been won at the same time. If it is determined that the winning combination group "Middle Bell" has been won, it means that the "Middle Bell", "One-sheet role 5" to "One-sheet role 8" have been won at the same time, and the winning combination group "Right Bell" has been selected. If it is determined that the player has won, it means that he / she has won the "middle bell", "single role 9" to "single role 12" at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operating modes (pressing order) of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R, which are advantageous to the player, are applied to the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”, respectively. ) Is set in advance, and as shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 9, even if the combination lottery results (winning combination group) by the combination lottery means 103 are the same, the player is on the left, middle, or The stop control means 106 stops and controls the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that the winning mode (display mode) differs depending on the order in which the right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated. It is configured in.

That is, when a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously won by winning any of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" shown in FIG. 9, the left / middle / right stop switch The stop control means 106 is configured so that, among the winning combinations, the winning combinations that preferentially align the symbols related to the winning on the winning line are different according to the operation order of the 21L, 21M, and 21R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, for example, when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 103 is won by the winning combination group "left bell", the operation mode determining means 100a first uses the left stop switch 21L. When it is determined that the operation of is performed, the symbol "Bell", which is the display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" which is most advantageous to the player, is displayed in a state where it is aligned on the winning line. The left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped and controlled by the stop control means 106.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the operation mode determining means 100a that the left stop switch 21L has not been operated for the first time, the symbol "Bell", which is the display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell", is aligned on the winning line. The symbol is not displayed in the state of being in the state. That is, the operation mode is that the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated in a preset operation order corresponding to the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”). Unless it is determined by the determination means 100a, the symbol is not displayed in the display mode corresponding to the winning combination that is most advantageous to the players included in the winning combination group.

By the way, in the special game (bonus game), the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that in the normal game, and the game is easy to receive the payout of the game medal, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Yes, it is a game in which a player can win more medals.

When the game shifts to the special game state by winning the special role "BB" in FIG. 8, the big bonus game is executed. In the big bonus game, the regular bonus game is executed continuously. In the regular bonus game, the lottery table 671 that defines the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is from the normal game lottery table selected in the normal game, and the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is the normal game. By switching to the special game lottery table defined with a higher probability than in the case, the probability of winning a small winning combination is set to be higher than during a normal game. As a result, the special game becomes a game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Then, after shifting to the regular bonus game, the regular bonus game ends when a preset number of games, for example, seven games are played. Then, after shifting to the big bonus game, the big bonus game ends when a preset number of medals are paid out. That is, in the present embodiment, the big bonus game is set to end the special game (big bonus game) and shift to the normal game when the number of medals paid out in the big bonus game reaches a predetermined upper limit. ing.

Further, when the game shifts to the special game state by winning the special role "CB" in FIG. 8, the challenge bonus game is executed. In the challenge bonus game, all the winning roles are won, and the state where the pull-in range of the left reel is smaller than usual continues until the specified number of payouts. Then, after shifting to the challenge bonus game, the challenge bonus game ends when a preset number of medals are paid out.

When the result of the combination lottery of the combination lottery means 103 is the special combination winning (BB, CB), the stop control of the symbol based on the special combination winning is performed, but at this time, the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special combination is assigned. If not, the game shifts to the game state during the internal winning, and this special winning combination is carried over until the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special winning combination is assigned.

On the other hand, the small winning combination will not be carried over to the next game unless the pattern arrangement of the winning mode of the small winning combination is assigned in the game in which the winning combination is the small winning combination. In addition, in the case of winning a replay, no matter when the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the symbol related to any of "Replay 1" to "Replay 8" will always win a prize. Since the symbols are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that they are aligned on the line, they will definitely win the replay role.

By the way, in the case of winning any of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell", the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M at what timing, as in the case of the design related to the replay. , 21R is operated, but the symbols ("Bell", "R1", "R2") related to the winning combination groups "Left Bell", "Middle Bell", and "Right Bell" are always aligned on the winning line. Since the symbols of the right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged, be sure to win one of the "middle bell", "single combination 1" to "single combination 12". That is, if any of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" is won and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the left / middle / right stop Regardless of the timing at which the switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, so that the winning symbols (see FIG. 8) associated with each operation mode are aligned on the winning line. 13M and 13R are stopped and controlled by the stop control means 106.

In this embodiment, the AT (assist time) period starts from the next game of the game that won the "middle-stage cherry", and the AT game is executed. In the AT game, when any of the "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" is won, the operation mode (which stop switch is operated first) according to the type of the winning combination group (specific set winning). Should) be notified to the player. Then, after shifting to the AT period, the AT period ends when a preset number of times, for example, 20 AT games are performed.

(2) Setting control means 101
The setting control means 101 of FIG. 7 sets set values (settings 1 to 6). This set value is for selecting the lottery table 671 selected by the table selection means 102 described later, and any one of the set values is associated with each of the plurality of lottery tables 671 stored in the ROM 67. ing. Then, the setting control means 101 determines the on / off state of the setting change key switch 50b when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on while the setting change key switch 50b is on, the setting change processing starts a predetermined setting change process.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability in the lottery of the normal game is set to a plurality of stages distinguished by a plurality of types of set values (here, 6 types), and the lottery table 671 (normally) is set for each of the set values of the plurality of stages. A game lottery table) is associated with it. Then, when the above setting change process is started, the administrator of the pachinko hall in which the slot machine 1 is installed can change the setting value.

The procedure for changing the set value is performed as follows, for example. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts a setting change key (not shown) into the key cylinder and rotates while the power switch 50a is OFF, and turns on the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, the setting change process is started by turning on the power switch 50a.

Then, the set value of the winning probability is cyclically switched from setting 1 to setting 6 for each operation of the setting change button 50c by the administrator. This set value is notified by displaying it on the set value display 56. When the set value of the winning probability becomes a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, the set value is fixed by operating the start switch 19. Then, when the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting change key switch 50b, the setting change process is completed. After that, for example, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 25, the game is started.

(3) Table selection means 102
The table selection means 102 of FIG. 7 is a type of game controlled by the game control means 100 on the main control board 63 (normal game, internal winning game, special game, etc.), and a set value set by the setting control means 101 (a normal game, an internal winning game, a special game, etc.). One lottery table is selected from a plurality of lottery tables 671 based on the settings 1 to 6). That is, for example, in a normal game, the table selection means 102 selects the lottery table 671 (normal game lottery table) as the lottery table according to the set value of the winning probability (settings 1 to 6).

(4) Role lottery means 103
The combination lottery means 103 of FIG. 7 selects any one of a plurality of combination lottery results including the preset specific set winning and loss as the combination lottery result in the current game by the random number and the table selection means 102. It is selected and determined by a lottery process using the lottery table 671. Here, in each lottery table 671, the correspondence between the random number value and each winning combination lottery result is defined. Specifically, for example, in each lottery table 671, the random numbers generated by the random number generating means 103a described later are generated. Data indicating an area to which each winning combination lottery result is associated in the entire range is stored.

This combination lottery means 103 has a plurality of specific set winnings each consisting of a plurality of roles (the winning combination group "left bell" and "middle bell" consisting of "middle bell", "single role 1" to "single role 4". "One piece role 5" to "One piece role 8" Winning role group "Middle bell", "Middle stage bell" "One piece role 9" to "One piece role 12" Winning role group "Right bell" ), Multiple winning combination lottery results including multiple specific set winnings with different operation modes (which stop switch should be operated first) of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R, which are advantageous to the player, respectively. Execute a lottery to see if you have won any of the above.

a) Random number generation means 103a
The random number generating means 103a of FIG. 7 generates a random number for lottery within a predetermined random number value range. Further, the random number generation means 103a can be configured by, for example, an oscillation circuit and a counter circuit for counting the clock signal generated by the oscillation circuit (so-called hard random number). The random number generating means 103a can also be configured by, for example, a means for generating a random number by the average picking method or a means for generating a random number by adding prime numbers. These means can be configured, for example, by causing the main CPU 61 to execute a predetermined program (so-called soft random numbers). It should be noted that both hard random numbers and soft random numbers may be provided, and random numbers may be generated softly based on the results.

b) Random number extraction means 103b
The random number extracting means 103b of FIG. 7 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generating means 103a, and extracts the random number value generated by the random number generating means 103a under a predetermined condition. The random number extracting means 103b extracts a random number value used for the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 103 in the current game at the timing when the start switch 19 is operated.

Further, since the random number generating means 103a is configured by a counter circuit or the like, the numerical value generated by the random number generating means 103a is not strictly a random number. However, since the timing at which the start switch 19 is operated is considered to be random, the numerical value extracted by the random number extracting means 103b can be substantially treated as a random number.

c) Lottery result determination means 103c
The lottery result determining means 103c of FIG. 7 determines the winning combination lottery result in the current game based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means 103b in the current game and the game state in the current game. The lottery result determining means 103c refers to the lottery table 671 corresponding to the current gaming state selected by the table selecting means 102, and the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means 103b is defined by the lottery table 671. The combination lottery result in the current game is determined by determining which area of the random number value area corresponding to each combination lottery result belongs to.

(5) Reel detecting means 105
The reel detecting means 105 of FIG. 7 has detection signals of the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R and left / middle / right reel motors 14L, 14M for driving the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. , The rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are detected based on the number of supply pulses to 14R, respectively. The reel detecting means 105 corresponds to a symbol located at a predetermined reference position (for example, in the middle of the display window 11 in the present embodiment) when the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are rotating and when the rotation is stopped. Detect each frame number.

(6) Stop control means 106
The stop control means 106 of FIG. 7 uses a stop table 672 to perform stop control for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R based on the operation for each of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. Is performed, and the symbols variably displayed by each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped in a display mode corresponding to the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103. The stop control means 106 has left / middle / right reels 13L, based on the winning combination lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means 103c and the operation modes of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R for each game. Stop control of 13M and 13R is performed.

As described in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 9, when the "bell group" (one of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell") is won, the first Depending on the stop switch to be operated, the roles to be aligned are set to be different. In addition, the advantageous operation mode differs depending on the type of "bell group".

As the stop table 672 for determining the stop positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, a plurality of tables are set corresponding to each of the winning combination lottery results of the winning combination lottery means 103. The stop table 672 has left, middle, and right reels according to the rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated. The number of sliding frames of 13L, 13M, 13R is predetermined, and for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, the corresponding left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are set to the stop operation order. Correspondingly, the number of sliding frames is formed to be different.

Further, if the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103 is a winning combination, the stop control means 106 has a stop table 672 selected based on the winning combination lottery result and a left / middle / right stop switch. From the rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when each of the 21L, 21M, and 21R is operated, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively, so as to win the winning combination. The number of sliding frames is determined, and stop control for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed. On the other hand, if the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 103 is lost, the stop control means 106 has a stop table 672 selected based on the losing winning combination lottery result and left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. From the rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when each is operated, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R slide respectively so as not to win any of multiple roles. The number of frames is determined, and stop control for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed.

By the way, there is an upper limit on the number of sliding frames, and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R at the timing when they are in the predetermined rotation positions, respectively. If not operated, the stop control means 106 is a winning mode in which the symbol displayed on the display window 11 corresponds to the winning combination even if the combination lottery result by the combination lottery means 103 is a winning combination. It is not possible to stop and control each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that the stop is displayed at. In other words, the stop control means 106 corresponds to the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R at the timings when the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are at predetermined rotation positions, respectively, based on the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103. Left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M so that the symbols displayed on the display window 11 are stopped and displayed in the winning mode corresponding to the winning combination, provided that the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. , 13R are stopped and controlled respectively.

(7) Notification determination means 107
The notification determining means 107 of FIG. 7 determines whether or not to notify the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R which is advantageous to the player. For example, even if the result of the role lottery is "right bell", if the player cannot know that fact, the player does not always operate the right stop switch 21R first, but presses the "middle bell". It is not always possible to align them. On the other hand, in AT games, when the result of the role lottery becomes "right bell", a notification to that effect is given and the right stop switch 21R is urged to operate first, thereby increasing the chances of the player receiving the payout. It will be possible.

Here, when the "middle-stage cherry", which is a transitional role for shifting to the AT allowable state where the lottery of the AT game can be performed, is won, the notification determination means 107 determines to perform notification, and the flag storage means 651 is further stored. The flag state is set to ON during the AT period. Further, the state of the flag during the AT period stored in the flag storage means 651 is set to OFF when the AT game is executed a preset number of times. Further, by assigning any one of the bits forming the flag storage means 651 to the flag during the AT period and setting ON and OFF of the bit, the state of the flag during the AT period is stored in the flag storage means 651. can do.

Then, in the AT game, when any of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" is won, the operation mode (operation order) that is advantageous to the player preset in each winning combination group. ) Is notified to the player. After shifting to the AT period, the AT period ends when a preset number of times, for example, 20 AT games are performed.

Further, as will be described later, the command creating means 108 creates a command according to the determination result of the notification determining means 107. The notification determining means 107 sets the command created by the command creating means 108 as a command that can identify the type of the specific set winning (a command that understands an advantageous operation mode), or a command that cannot identify the type of the specific set winning (advantageous). It also functions as a command for deciding whether or not to use a command for which the operation mode is unknown.

(8) Command creation means 108
The command creating means 108 of FIG. 7 is a data related to the winning combination lottery result in the lottery process by the winning combination lottery means 103, and an operating tool operated by a player such as a left / middle / right stop switch 21L, 21M, 21R, and a start switch 19. A command for transmitting various data such as operation data to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) is generated. The command generated by the command creating means 108 is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) by the sub control command transmitting means 111 as described later.

The command creating means 108 creates a command including "0" to "8" as a command capable of identifying the result of the lottery when the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 103 is executed. As will be described later, the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) selects an effect to be executed based on the sent command. In other words, the command creating means 108 creates a command instructing the effect content to be executed on the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

Then, when the command creating means 108 is determined by the notification determining means 107 not to notify the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player, that is, when the flag is set to OFF during the AT period, any of the "bell groups" It is possible to identify that the crab was won, but create a command that does not include data indicating the type of the winning winning combination group ("left bell", "middle bell", "right bell") and cannot identify the winning combination group. Further, when it is determined by the notification determining means 107 to notify the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player, that is, when the flag is set to ON during the AT period, the winning combination group (“left bell” or “middle bell”). Create a command that includes data indicating the type of "right bell") and can identify the corresponding elected group.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the command creation means 108 wins any of the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" when the flag is OFF during the AT period. Even if there is, create the same command "No. 1" so that it is not possible to identify which of the "bell groups" is the winning combination group. On the other hand, the command creation means 108 uses the "No. 2" command when the "left bell" is won when the flag is ON during the AT period, and the "No. 3" command when the "middle bell" is won. , If you win the "right bell", create the command "No. 4".

The command creating means 108 creates the same command for the other winning combination lottery results regardless of whether the flag is ON or OFF during the AT period. For example, if you win the "middle cherry", you can use the "5" command, if you win the "BB", you can use the "6" command, and if you win the "CB", you can use the "7" command. , If you win the "Replay", create the command "No. 8". In case of loss, create the "0" command.

(9) Design determination means 109
In the symbol determination means (corresponding to the “winning determination means”) 109 of FIG. 7, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R detected by the reel detection means 105 are based on their respective rotation positions, and are stopped by the stop control means 106. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the symbol by each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R that has been stopped and stopped is a predetermined display mode.

When the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display mode shown in the winning combination "BB" and "CB" in FIG. 8, the symbol determining means 109 determines that the special winning combination is won. Further, when the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display modes shown in "Middle bell", "One piece combination 1" to "One piece combination 12", and "Middle stage cherry" in FIG. The determination is made, and when the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display modes shown in "Replay 1" to "Replay 8" of FIG. 8, the symbol determining means 109 determines that the player has won the replay combination.

(10) Payout control means 110
The payout control means 110 of FIG. 7 gives a predetermined benefit to the player based on the determination result by the symbol determination means 109. When it is determined by the symbol determination means 109 that the payout control means 110 has won any of a plurality of combinations, the number of credit medals stored is the upper limit value (this implementation) if the prize is a medal payout. After reaching (for example, 50 medals) in the form, the hopper unit 43 is operated to pay out medals by the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination. Further, the payout control means 110 increases the number of credit medals to be paid out by the number of payouts instead of the operation of the hopper unit 43 as the payout of medals until the number of stored credit medals reaches the upper limit value.

By the way, when it is determined by the symbol determination means 109 that the payout control means 110 has won the re-game combination, the payout control means 110 considers that a predetermined number (3 medals) of medals have been inserted, and validates the winning line of the next game. To do.

(11) Sub-control command transmitting means 111
The sub-control command transmitting means 111 of FIG. 7 uses a command including various data created by the command creating means 108 from the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) to the sub-control board 73 (sub CPU 71) as predetermined information. Send by traffic. The sub-control command transmitting means 111 is created by the command creating means 108, and the set value set by the setting control means 101, the gaming state such as the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 103, A command including data indicating the state of the slot machine 1, such as the symbol determination result by the symbol determination means 109, the rotation / stop states of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, and the medal payout state by the payout control means 110. It transmits to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 111 transmits a command created by the command creating means 108 including data indicating the detection state of the inserted medal by the insertion sensor 53, the operating state of the bet switch 15 and the maximum bet switch 17, and the like. It is transmitted to 73 (sub CPU 71). Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 111 is created by the command creating means 108 including data indicating that the start switch 19 and various switches such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R have been operated by the player. Command is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

(12) Specific event detection means 112
The specific event detecting means 112 of FIG. 7 is for detecting whether or not a specific event has occurred. Specifically, this specific event includes a state in which an abnormal state different from the normal state is occurring in the slot machine 1, that is, a so-called error occurrence.

Specifically, the specific event includes, for example, a game medal error, a payout game medal error, a payout failure error, a payout game medal out error, an RWM error, a reel error, an overflow error, and a game medal payout device connection error, which will be described later. This applies to sensor errors, etc. Error codes (E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, EA) for classifying each type are set in these specific events (errors). The details of these errors will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

(13) Game stop means 113
The game stopping means 113 of FIG. 7 is for stopping the game (error processing) so that the game cannot proceed based on the detection of the occurrence of the specific event (error) by the specific event detecting means 112.

(14) Flag storage means 651
The flag storage means 651 of FIG. 7 is composed of an area preset in the RWM 65 and stores various flags.

(15) Game counter 652
The game number counter (400 counter) 652 of FIG. 7 is composed of an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the number of games. The initial number of games, which is the initial value of the game number counter 652, is set to 0. The game number counter 652 counts the number of games up to the preset number of games M (M = 400 in this embodiment), then is initialized to the initial value of 0 again, and then reaches the number of games M. It is configured to count the number of games. In the program, 0 to 399 are counted, and when it reaches 399, it returns to the initial value of 0 again.

(16) Game information storage means 653
The game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 is composed of an area preset in the RWM 65, and is shown in FIG. 10 with the predetermined number of games as the predetermined aggregation standard being 400 games and the set number of games M as the setting aggregation standard being 6000. Store data.

As shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (in FIG. 10). A 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of the total number of payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 (corresponding to the total number of payouts from P1 to P15) (in FIG. 10). (Corresponding to the total number of cumulative PS payouts), a 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total total number of payouts in FIG. 10) for storing the total total number of total payouts since installation or after clearing RWM is formed. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a 2-byte storage area (FIG. 10) for storing the number of bonuses paid out for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in the game information storage means 653. (Corresponding to the number of bonuses paid out from P1 to P15 in 10), a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of the number of bonuses paid out for 400 games in each period from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. (Corresponding to the cumulative number of PS characters paid out in FIG. 10), 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of characters paid out after installation or after clearing RWM (total total number of characters in FIG. 10) (Corresponding to the number of payouts) is formed. Here, the number of bonuses paid out is the total of the number of pieces paid out in BB and the number of pieces paid out in CB. If there is SB, it is the total of the number of sheets to be paid out in BB, the number of sheets to be paid out in CB, and the number of sheets to be paid out in SB. However, SB corresponds to a normal character, and the probability of a small role increases by one game, and even if it is lost, it is not carried over to the next game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area (2 bytes) for storing the number of continuous bonuses paid out for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. (Corresponding to the number of continuous bonuses paid out from P1 to P15 in FIG. 10), 3 bytes for storing the cumulative value of the number of continuous bonuses paid out for 400 games in each period from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. Storage area (corresponding to the cumulative PS continuous payout number in FIG. 10), 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts after installation or after clearing the RWM (in FIG. 10) (Corresponding to the total number of consecutive bonuses paid out) has been formed. Here, the number of continuous accessory payouts is the number of payouts in BB. Even if there is SB, it is the number of sheets to be paid out in BB.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 has a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games since the installation or after the RWM is cleared (corresponding to the total total number of games in FIG. 10). , A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10) for storing the number of advantageous section games after installation or after clearing RWM is formed. Information related to the special game permissible state can be aggregated and used to perform a predetermined calculation.

As shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 is provided with the accessory ratio in the latest 6000 games (percentage of the cumulative PS bonus payout number in FIG. 10 to the total cumulative PS payout number: "Character ratio (6000)". A 1-byte storage area for storing (game) ”(corresponding to the cumulative PS bonus ratio in FIG. 10), and the bonus ratio in the cumulative game (total cumulative number of bonus payouts in FIG. 10). A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative bonus ratio in FIG. 10) is formed to store the percentage of the total cumulative number of payouts: "role ratio (cumulative)"). ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the game information storage means 653 is provided with the continuous bonus ratio in the latest 6000 games (percentage of the cumulative PS continuous bonus payout number in FIG. 10 to the total cumulative PS payout number: "continuous". A 1-byte storage area for storing (referred to as "character ratio (6000 games)") (corresponding to the continuous character ratio of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and the continuous character ratio in the cumulative game (in FIG. 10). Percentage of the total number of consecutive bonuses paid out to the total number of continuous bonuses: "Continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)") 1-byte storage area (total cumulative number in FIG. 10) (Corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio) is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the game information storage means 653, the advantageous section ratio in the cumulative game (the percentage of the total total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10 to the total total number of games: "advantageous section ratio ( A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the advantageous section ratio of the total cumulative total in FIG. 10) for storing the "cumulative total)" is formed.

The size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, among a plurality of combinations, specific combinations having different advantages given to the player depending on the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (left bell, middle bell, right in FIG. 9). There is a bell). When the combination lottery result of the combination lottery means 103 becomes the specific combination winning result in which the specific combination is won, the special game control means (not shown) of the main CPU 61 is an AT game (advantageous operation mode corresponding to the specific combination). (Special game) to notify identifiable.

In a game in an AT non-permissible state (a special game non-permissible state that does not allow special games), when the middle cherry is won as a result of the role lottery by the role lottery means 103, the payout display control means 118 allows the special game. The AT permissible state (special game permissible state that allows special games, "Special game permissible state," which controls to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 corresponding to the state display means that can identify whether the state or the special game non-permissible state is displayed. (Corresponding to "advantageous section") is displayed (display of the special game allowable state), and the game state setting means 100b shifts the game state of the slot machine 1 to the AT allowable state (special game allowable state that allows special games). , Set the initial number of games during the AT period. In the lighting control of the advantageous section lamp 47, the payout display control means 118 sets data on whether or not to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 after paying out the medals, and based on the set data, the advantageous section lamp 47 is set. The lamp 47 is lit. Here, after winning the middle cherry and paying out the medals, the data for lighting the advantageous section lamp 47 is set, and the set data (the advantageous section lamp is lit). The advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on according to the data). Then, when the set number of games is completed, the payout display control means 118 controls to turn off the advantageous section lamp 47 to display the AT non-allowable state (display of the special game non-allowable state), and the game state setting means. 100b shifts the gaming state of the slot machine 1 to the AT non-allowable state. It should be noted that the process of determining whether or not the middle cherry has been won corresponds to an example of the process of determining whether or not the game state setting means 100b is in the special game allowable state in the game in the special game non-allowable state. ..

The number of games in the period during which the control to light the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed, that is, the AT allowable state is the advantageous section, and the number of games in the advantageous section is the number of games during the period in which the control to light the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed (game). Number). The counting means 114a counts the number of games (the number of games) as the number of advantageous section games, provided that the control to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate information related to the special game permissible state and perform a predetermined calculation using the information.

In the present embodiment, when the middle cherry is won, the AT period of 20 games is given without exception, but 0 games (loss) may be given with a predetermined probability. In this case, when the middle cherry is won, the AT allowable state is entered, and the payout display control means 118 controls the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 until a predetermined AT allowable state end condition is satisfied. The AT permissible state end condition is, for example, a 1/8 fall lottery is performed in each game excluding the winning game of the so-called rare role such as the middle cherry in the AT permissible state, and if this is won, the AT is not permissible from the AT permissible state. Configure to transition to the state. At this time, if the fall lottery is won, the payout display control means 118 controls the extinguishing of the lit advantageous section lamp 47. Until the fall lottery is won, for example, it is decided whether or not to set the AT period by the AT lottery of each game. If the AT lottery is won, the initial number of games in the AT period is determined, and for example, the AT period starts from the next game. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning combination lottery result is one of the winning combination 1-12. During the AT period, the fall lottery is not performed, and the game in which the AT period has ended shifts from the AT allowable state to the AT non-allowable state. At this time, the payout display control means 118 controls the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 to be turned off. In this way, the AT game may not be performed even in the AT allowable state, but even in such a case, the number of advantageous section games is regarded as an advantageous section in which the AT period may occur during the AT allowable state. Reflect in. Even when the AT period granted by winning the AT lottery ends, the AT allowable state may be maintained, and when the same fall lottery is won, the AT non-allowable state may be entered.

However, regarding the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has a ring buffer structure, and the first period P1 and the second period P2 , 3rd period P3, ..., 14th period P14, 15th period P15, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, ... The ring pointer is updated every 400 games, and the value of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer is updated every game after being cleared. Further, regarding the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the cumulative PS and the total cumulative total are updated every 400 games. Further, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are updated every game. Further, the total number of games is information that is updated regardless of the determination result of the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109.

The advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is calculated for each game. Further, the bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated every 400 games.

The total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of games, and the number of advantageous section games correspond to the tabulation items, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games). , Character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (cumulative), and character ratio (cumulative) correspond to calculation items.

The total number of games is information that is updated regardless of the determination result of the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109, and the information is updated by the aggregation means 114a described later.

In addition, the cumulative PS, the total cumulative number of bonuses paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out are information that is aggregated (every 400 games in the present embodiment) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in each period from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15 are totaled even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game). The total total number of games and the total number of advantageous section games are aggregated even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in the present embodiment). It should be noted that the establishment of the predetermined conditions is set to every 400 games in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. , The ratio display 69 is displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, in the predetermined order, the first is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the second is the continuous winning combination ratio (6000 games), the third is the winning combination ratio (6000 games), and the fourth is the continuous winning combination. The object ratio (cumulative), and the fifth is the accessory ratio (cumulative).

The continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are set every 400 games in the present embodiment when the predetermined conditions are met. It is a calculation item to be calculated, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is a calculation item to be calculated even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (every game in this embodiment). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games). The cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative) are the specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the reverse of the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). Calculated in order). Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only the calculation item of the first order in the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative)) is calculated. .. It should be noted that the establishment of the predetermined conditions is set to every 400 games in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the specific order is reversed from the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the specific order is displayed on the ratio display 69. It may be the same as the predetermined order. Further, the calculation item of the first order in the predetermined order is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), but the calculation item is not limited to this.

(17) Game history monitoring means 114
The game history monitoring means 114 of FIG. 7 monitors the game history and functions as the counting means 114a and the calculation means 114b.

a) Aggregation means 114a
The counting means 114a of FIG. 7 updates the stored value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 for each game, and the counting means 114a is a game by stopping the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. The stored value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 is incremented by 1 after the end of the game and before the start of the next game. Further, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the stored value of the game number counter 652 is equal to the set game number M (= 400) which is the set counting standard, and the stored value of the game number counter 652 is the set game number M ( If it is equal to = 400), the stored value of the game number counter 652 is cleared to 0, which is the initial value. The initial value of the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to the set number of games M (= 400), and the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to 1 after the game is finished and before the start of the next game. The number of games may be counted by decrementing them one by one.

Further, the totaling means 114a totals the stored contents of the game information storage means 653 shown in FIG. In the present specification, claims, drawings, etc., "aggregation" means "collecting and totaling numbers", "accumulating numbers", and "collecting and totaling numbers so far". It shall include "adding a new value to the value that has been calculated or the value that has been accumulated so far".

Specifically, the counting means 114a is required for the values of the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in each game, corresponding to the ring pointers from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. By adding the number of winnings according to the above, the values of the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the relevant period are updated. Further, the totaling means 114a is updated by incrementing the value of the total total number of games in each game by 1, and updating by incrementing the value of the total number of advantageous section games by 1 as necessary.

Further, the counting means 114a calculates the cumulative total of the total number of payouts from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 for every 400 games, stores the cumulative value in the total number of cumulative PS payouts, and starts from the first period P1. Calculate the cumulative number of bonuses paid out up to the 15th period P15, store the accumulated value in the cumulative PS bonuses paid out, and calculate the cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. Then, the cumulative value is stored in the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS. Further, the counting means 114a adds the total number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total total number of payouts every 400 games, thereby adding the total number of total payouts. The total number of bonuses paid out is updated by updating the number of cards and adding the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15 to the total number of bonuses paid out. , The total number of continuous bonuses paid out is updated by adding the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 to the total number of continuous bonuses paid out.

The counting means 114a updates the ring pointer after updating the stored contents of the above-mentioned game information storage means 653 performed every 400 games when the number of games after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 400, and the first period Clear the values of the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from P1 to the 15th period P15 to 0. The update of the ring pointer is as follows: 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, 3rd period P3, ..., 14th period P14, 15th period P15, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, ... The first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are repeated in order.

b) Arithmetic means 114b
The calculation means 114b of FIG. 7 calculates an advantageous section ratio (cumulative) for each game based on the stored contents of FIG. 10, and has a continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), a bonus ratio (6000 games), and a continuous bonus ratio. (Cumulative) and bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated for every 400 games.

In the calculation of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of advantageous section games to the total total number of games is calculated. Further, in the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS continuous bonus payout to the total cumulative PS payout is calculated, and the bonus ratio (6000 games) is calculated. In the calculation, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS payout number to the total PS payout number is calculated. Furthermore, in the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses paid out to the total cumulative number of payouts is calculated, and in the calculation of the bonus ratio (cumulative). , Calculate the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of bonuses paid out to the total number of total payouts.

(18) Display control means 115
The display control means 115 of FIG. 7 performs display control for displaying on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 based on FIGS. 12, 13, and 14, and display control for displaying based on FIG.

First, the correspondence between a plurality of litable locations of the 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data will be described with reference to FIG.

The 7-segment display has eight lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, and eight lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Corresponds to the 0th bit, the 1st bit, the 2nd bit, the 3rd bit, the 4th bit, the 5th bit, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit of the 1-byte (8-bit) display data, respectively. When the value is 0, it is turned off, and when it is 1, it is turned on. Regarding bits, the least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and regarding bytes, the least significant byte is described as the 1st byte.

For example, when the 1-byte value is $ FF (hexadecimal notation), that is, when 11111111 (binary notation), all of the lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP are all. Light. If the 1-byte value is $ 40 (hexadecimal notation), that is, 01000000 (binary notation), the lighting possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP can be lit. Only the part G lights up.

The display control means 115 can light a part of all the litable parts of the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the thousands, tens, and ones of the ratio display 69 can be lit. The predetermined game inspection information out of the five types of game inspection information is displayed using the parts that can be lit other than the part DP (dot part), and the display target of the ratio indicator 69 is 5 at regular intervals. By sequentially changing to another game inspection information among the types of game inspection information, the five types of game inspection information are periodically displayed using the above-mentioned other litable points of the ratio display 69. Then, the display control means 115 receives at least one of the five types of game inspection information during the display control of the five types of game inspection information using the other litable portion of the ratio display 69. In the case of an abnormal state, a predetermined abnormality notification display is performed using the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio indicator 69. However, in the present embodiment, the game inspection information includes inspection data (for example, advantageous section ratio (cumulative)) obtained by the calculation means 114b and information for identifying the inspection data. In the present embodiment, the display mode according to the display method of FIGS. 12 to 14 is referred to as "normal display mode", and the display control of this normal display mode is referred to as "normal display control".

Hereinafter, the display contents in the normal display control by the display control means 115 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14.

First, with reference to FIG. 12, the display contents of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information during the normal display control will be described. However, the display content in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 12 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, the percentage (%) is 50 (%), and none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. If.

The ratio display 69 has, as display items of game inspection information, (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), (3) accessory ratio (6000 games), (4). ) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), (5) Character ratio (cumulative), and these are lit in the thousands, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69 according to the display method shown in FIG. Possible location Displayed using other lighting possible locations excluding DP (dot part). However, the ratio display number in FIG. 12 indicates the display order.

Specifically, in (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "7A" indicating "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio indicator 69. Is displayed, and the number of advantageous section games in the cumulative game since it was installed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio display 69 and after the RWM was cleared (total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10). The two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of games in the cumulative game (total total number of games in FIG. 10) is displayed.

Further, in (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation "6b" indicating "continuous character ratio (6000 games)" is shown in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. Is displayed, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the last 6000 games (the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10) in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio indicator 69 is the latest. Two effective numerical values of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of payouts in 6000 games (total number of payouts of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) are displayed.

Further, in (3) the character ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation "7b" indicating the "character ratio (6000 games)" is added to the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. It is displayed, and the total number of bonuses paid out in the last 6000 games (cumulative PS bonus payouts in FIG. 10) in the last two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio indicator 69 in the last 6000 games. Two effective numerical values of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of payouts (total number of payouts of cumulative PS in FIG. 10) are displayed.

Furthermore, in (4) continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "6c" indicating "continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)" is added to the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. It is displayed, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative game since it was installed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio display 69 or after the RWM was cleared (the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10). ), The ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of payouts (total number of payouts in the total cumulative number in FIG. 10) in the cumulative game after installation or after clearing RWM is displayed.

Further, in (5) Character ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "7c" indicating "character ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. , Installation of the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative game after installation in the lower two digits (tens digit and ones digit) segment of the ratio display 69 or after clearing RWM (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) Two effective numerical values of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of payouts (total total number of payouts in FIG. 10) in the cumulative game after or after clearing RWM are displayed.

However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (tens digit and one digit) segment of the ratio indicator 69, and therefore, in the present embodiment, it is lower than the ratio indicator 69. 99 (%) is displayed in the 2-digit (tens and ones) segments.

However, (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), (3) character ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous character ratio (cumulative), (5) roles In the object ratio (cumulative total), as shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 12, the lit place DP in the hundreds place is lit. By lighting the lit-up place DP in the hundreds place, it is easy to grasp the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment when the game inspection information is not in an abnormal state.

These (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), (3) character ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous character ratio (cumulative), (5) roles The product ratio (cumulative) is displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period of time, and then (3) the accessory ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period of time. Subsequently, (4) the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period, and then (5) the bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a fixed period.

Then, the game inspection information of these display items (1) to (5) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, for example, when the number of games has not reached 6000, the upper two-digit segments are displayed blinking in (2) and (3). Further, for example, when the number of games has not reached 175,000, the upper two-digit segments are displayed blinking in (1), (4), and (5). Furthermore, in (1) to (5), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative) are respectively. In the case of a value equal to or higher than a predetermined value (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “ratio specified value”) corresponding to the above, the lower two-digit segment is displayed blinking.

However, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the display is performed from (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) regardless of the display items when the power is turned off. For example, (3) when the power is turned off while the accessory ratio (6000 games) is being displayed and the power is turned on again, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed.

The abbreviation is an example and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 12, and may be different between the display items.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 13, the display content of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information during the normal display control in the model having no advantageous section will be described. However, the display content in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 13 is a specific display example of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in a model having no advantageous section, and when none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. is there.

As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 13, the litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 excluding the litable parts DP (dot part) of each of the thousands, tens, and ones are used. , The abbreviation "7A" indicating "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69, and the lower two digits (ten's) of the ratio display 69. "---" (only the litable part G is lit) is displayed in the segment (the place and the ones place). However, as in the case of (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in FIG. 12, in the case of (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in FIG. ing.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 14, the display content of the ratio indicator 69 related to the display for the predetermined abnormality notification during the normal display control will be described. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 14B is a specific display example of the ratio display 69.

Ratios calculated by the calculation means 114b as abnormal states of the five types of game inspection information (in this embodiment, advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous When the value of the bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) is equal to or higher than the specified ratio value, the total number of games since the installation or after clearing the RWM used to calculate the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (total in FIG. 10). The value stored in the storage area corresponding to the cumulative total number of games) may be less than 175,000.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 (continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)) and 4 (role ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, the ratio is displayed. The litable part DP (dot part) of the first place of the vessel 69 blinks. In addition, the ratio display number 0 (advantageous section ratio (cumulative)), 1 (continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)), 2 (feature ratio (6000 games)), 3 (continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)), 4 When at least one ratio of (role ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, the tens digit litable part DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69 blinks. Further, when the total number of games after installation or after clearing RWM is less than 175,000, the litable portion DP (dot portion) in the thousands of place of the ratio display 69 blinks.

As shown in FIG. 14B, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is the ratio specified value or more and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 is lit. While displaying the game inspection information using other litable parts other than the possible parts, the litable parts DP (1st place and 10th place) of some of the above litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 ( The dot portion) blinks, and the litable portion DP (dot portion) in the thousands of the above-mentioned partial littable portions of the ratio indicator 69 is extinguished. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio specified value or more.

Further, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or more than the ratio specified value, and all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the ratio specified value, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, the ratio is displayed. Game inspection information is displayed using other litable parts other than the above-mentioned part of the litable part of the device 69, and the tens digit of the above-mentioned part of the litable part of the ratio indicator 69 is lit. The possible part DP (dot part) blinks, and the litable part DP (dot part) of each of the above-mentioned partial litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 is turned off.

In addition, when all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 are less than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is less than 175,000, the other litable parts other than the above-mentioned some litable parts of the ratio display 69 are displayed. While displaying the game inspection information by using, the litable part DP (dot part) of the thousands of the above-mentioned part of the litable parts of the ratio display 69 blinks, and the above one of the ratio display 69 is displayed. The litable part DP (dot part) of each of the lit place and the tens place of the part that can be lit is turned off.

Further, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or more than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is less than 175,000, the ratio display 69 has other litable parts excluding some of the above litable parts. While displaying the game inspection information using, the litable parts DP (dot parts) of the ones, tens, and thousandss of the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 are blinking. To do. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio specified value or more.

Further, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or more than the ratio specified value, all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the ratio specified value, and the total number of games is less than 175,000, the ratio is displayed. Game inspection information is displayed using other litable parts other than the above-mentioned part of the litable part of the device 69, and the tens digit and the thousand of the above-mentioned part of the litable part of the ratio indicator 69 are displayed. The litable part DP (dot part) of each place blinks, and the litable part DP (dot part) of the first place among the above-mentioned part of the litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 is turned off.

In addition, when all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 are less than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, the other litable parts other than the above-mentioned some litable parts of the ratio display 69 are displayed. In addition to displaying the game inspection information, the litable parts DP (dot parts) of the ones, tens, and thousandss of the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 are turned off. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, considering that the display of the ratio indicator 69 has a portion where blinking control is performed according to an abnormal state, a specific example of FIG. 14B shows lighting during blinking control for the portion. It will be the illustration inside.

Subsequently, the display contents of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 15 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69 when an RWM error occurs.

As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 15, when an RWM error occurs, all the littable locations A and B at each of the thousands, hundreds, tens, and ones of the ratio display 69. , C, D, E, F, G, DP light up. In the present embodiment, the display mode according to the display method of FIG. 15 is referred to as a special display mode, and the display control of this special display mode is referred to as "special display control".

Comparing the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 15 with the display contents of the 7-segment display columns of FIGS. 12, 13, and 14, the special display control when the RWM error of FIG. 15 occurs is shown in FIG. , All the littable parts of the ratio display 69 are lit without displaying the game inspection information displayed by the normal display control of FIGS. 13 and 14. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize that an RWM error has occurred by displaying the ratio display 69 in which the game inspection information is not displayed and all the litable parts of the ratio display 69 are lit.

(19) Credit display control means 116
The credit display control means 116 of FIG. 7 performs display control for displaying the number of stored medals on the credit display 45.

(20) Cancel control means 117
The cancel control means 117 of FIG. 7 does not drive the cancel coil using the electromagnet, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum number of stored medals or during the game, so that the rail portion of the medal selector 48 does not operate. , The medals inserted into the medal slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout port 39 regardless of whether they are regular or irregular. In cases other than the above, a cancel coil using an electromagnet is driven to operate the rail portion of the medal selector 48, whereby whether or not the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is legitimate is selected. Only regular medals are led to the hopper unit 43.

(21) Payout display control means 118
The payout display control means 118 of FIG. 7 can specify (1) payout number display control for displaying the number of payouts on the payout display 46 via the payout control means 110, and (2) specify the type of a specific event (error). The error code display control for displaying special information (error code), which is various information, is switched. Further, the payout display control means 118 indicates that the payout display 46 is in an advantageous section state by lighting the tens digit, the ones digit, or both dots (corresponding to the litable portion DP), and the tens digit. Display control is performed to indicate that the section is not in the advantageous section state by turning off the dot and the one-digit dot.

Here, the game stopping means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until the final reel (the last reel to be stopped among the left, middle, and right reels 113L, 113M, and 113R) is stopped. , Game stop (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation on the final reel is performed (specifically, after the slip occurs after the stop operation on the final reel and after the 4-phase excitation by the stepping motor). I do. At the same time, the payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying special information (error code) on the payout display 46.

That is, the game stopping means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until the last reel (final reel) to be stopped among the left, middle, and right reels 113L, 113M, and 113R is stopped. Then, the game stop means 113 performs a game stop (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation for the final reel is performed, and the payout display control means 118 gives special information (error code) to the payout display 46. Display control to display. However, this does not apply to E5 errors.

Further, when the reset switch (not shown in particular, the setting change button 50c of the operation box 50 is also used as the reset switch) is operated in the state where the error has occurred, the game stop means 113 is used. The cancellation condition for canceling the game stop (error processing) is satisfied. In this case, the game stop means 113 releases the game stop by the game stop means 113 to enable the progress of the game. Further, the payout display control means 118 stops the display of the special information (error code display) performed on the payout display 46. However, in the case of an RWM error (E4 error), the RWM error (E4 error) is canceled by changing the setting.

Here, the display contents of the payout indicator 46 related to the error will be described with reference to FIG.

The error contents displayed on the payout display 46 include "game medal error", "payout game medal error", "payout defective error", "payout game medal out error", "RWM error", "reel error", and "reel error". There are "overflow error", "game medal payout device connection error", and "sensor error".

The game medal error (error code E0) is a state in which medals are accumulated or pass through the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48 in an abnormal state, and a 7-segment display (payout display) occurs. The display content in the column of (vessel) is displayed on the payout indicator 46. Further, the payout game medal error (error code E1) means that the medal is clogged at the payout exit of the hopper unit 43, and the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout display 46. Is displayed on. Further, the payout defective error (error code E2) means that the payout sensor 54 is in the ON state except when the medal is paid out, and the display content in the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout display 46. Is displayed on. The payout game medal out error (error code E3) is a so-called hopper empty state in which the medals in the hopper unit 43 are empty, and is displayed in the 7-segment display (payout display) column. The contents are displayed on the payout display 46.

The RWM error (error code E4) is a RWM (Read Write Memory) read / write memory, which is also referred to as a RAM (Random Access Memory) occasional write / read memory), and has a backup failure or the like. The display content in the display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46.

The reel error (error code E5) is a reel position detection error (position detection error by the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R), and is a left / middle / right reel 13L, 13M, 13R. Regarding the position detection of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R when the power is cut off during the stop processing of, or due to a failure of the reel unit during the stop processing of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. An error has occurred, and the display contents of the 7-segment display (payout display) column are displayed on the payout display 46. An overflow error (error code E6) is a state in which the auxiliary tank provided next to the hopper unit 43 is full of medals, and the display content in the 7-segment display (payout display) column is paid out. It is displayed on the display 46. Further, the game medal payout device connection error (error code E7) occurs when the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43 is defective and the hopper unit 43 is out of the normal position. Yes, the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46. Further, the sensor error (error code EA) is when the insertion sensor 53 for detecting the insertion of the medal detects the passage of the medal in the state where the abnormal passage of the medal has occurred and the insertion of the medal is not possible. The display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46.

Among these errors, in the game medal error (error code E0), payout failure error (error code E2), reel error (error code E5), and sensor error (error code EA), the left, middle, and right reels 13L, This is an error that can be detected even when at least one of 13M and 13R is rotating.

(Sub control board)
Next, the configuration of the sub-control board 73 will be described in detail. The sub-control board 73 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63, and performs an effect according to the operation and state of the main control board 63. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 73 has various functions realized by executing a program stored in the memory 75 and various functions realized by controlling the hardware. There is.

(1) Sub-control command receiving means 201
The sub-control command receiving means 201 of FIG. 7 receives commands including various data transmitted by the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) as predetermined information. The sub-control command receiving means 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63, and when the command is received, notifies each function included in the sub-control board 73 according to the type of the command.

(2) Production content determination means 202
The effect content determining means 202 of FIG. 7 is for determining the content of the effect according to the command received by the sub-control command receiving means 201. Specifically, the moving image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 can be determined from the effect patterns set in advance according to the progress of the game, the result of the winning combination lottery of the winning combination lottery means 103, and the speakers 31L and 31R. The music and sound to be played are determined, and the effects such as blinking the light sources of the upper lamp unit 33 and the lower lamp units 37L and 37R all at once or individually are determined.

Then, if the received command corresponds to the AT period and the type of the winning combination group (bell group) can be identified, the effect content determining means 202 is a player corresponding to the type of the winning combination group. The content of the effect is determined so that the notification effect that shows the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the effect that the player does not know the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is executed unless the received command corresponds to the AT period. For example, if the command "No. 1" shown in FIG. 9 is received according to the result of the combination lottery, it is not during the AT period, so it can be seen that one of the winning combination groups of the "bell group" has been won. Select one of the productions from the production group that you do not know whether you won the "left bell", "middle bell", or "right bell". In addition, when the command "No. 2" shown in FIG. 9 is received, one of the effects indicating that the "left bell" has been won and the effect of prompting the user to operate the left stop switch 21L first are selected. Select. When the commands "No. 3" and "No. 4" shown in FIG. 8 are received, the effect contents are determined in the same manner.

Further, when the production content determining means 202 receives the commands "No. 5" to "No. 8" shown in FIG. 9, similarly, one of the production groups suggesting the possibility of winning each winning combination group. Select the production of. Further, when the command "No. 0" is received, similarly, one production is selected from the production group corresponding to the loss so as not to impair the expectations of the player.

As the effect content, for example, the effect content determining means 202 displays the operation order of each of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R on the liquid crystal display 27, and the speakers 31L, 31R stop left / middle / right. The operation order of each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is notified by voice, and the lamps provided for each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are blinked in a predetermined order. , Or blinks the backlights provided on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R in a predetermined order to notify the operation order of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. There are production contents such as.

Then, the effect content determining means 202 transmits a signal including data related to the determined effect content to the effect display control means 203 and the voice control means 204, which will be described next.

(3) Effect display control means 203
The effect display control means 203 of FIG. 7 displays a moving image on the liquid crystal display 27 based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determining means 202, and displays the upper lamp unit 33, the lower lamp units 37L, 37R, and the like. Performs effects such as blinking the light sources of the above all at once or individually.

(4) Voice control means 204
The voice control means 204 of FIG. 7 executes an effect such as playing music or outputting sound from the speakers 31L and 31R based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determining unit 202.

(motion)
Subsequently, the operation of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 51. In this embodiment, if the "bell group" (either "left bell", "middle bell", or "right bell") is won during the AT period (the flag is ON during the AT period), the winner is won. The sub-control board 73 executes an effect of notifying the operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the combination group and being advantageous to the player, and the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R being advantageous to the player. The operation order is notified.

In the following description, the various functions and means described above and other functions realized by the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 executing various programs (detailed description is omitted). It is a process executed by. Further, since it is a well-known technique for setting various flags executed in the following processes to ON (ON) or OFF (OFF) and setting values for various flags, the details thereof. The explanation will be omitted.

1. 1. Power-on processing The power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power-on processing is a processing executed by the main CPU 61.

The power-on process shown in FIG. 17 is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on, and whether or not the power cut signal is turned on when the power switch 50a of the slot machine 1 is turned on. (Step S1), if the power interruption signal is determined to be ON (YES in step S1), the unit waits as it is, and if the power interruption signal is determined to be OFF (NO in step S1). ), The RWM65 can be accessed (step S2). Then, the RWM backup failure determination process, which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 18 (step S3). Subsequently, the initial setting process at power-on, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19, is performed (step S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (step S5). Then, when it is determined that the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (YES in step S5), the process proceeds to step S8.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S5 that the door sensor 58 is not in the ON state (front door 5 is in the closed state), that is, the front door 5 is in the open state (NO in step S5), the setting change key switch 50b is operated. It is determined whether or not it is in the ON state (step S6). Then, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S8. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state (YES in step S6), the setting change process described in detail later is performed using FIG. 21 (step S7). In this way, the slot machine 1 does not shift to the setting change process in step S7 unless the front door 5 is in the open state and the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state in order to improve safety as a countermeasure against fraud. It has become like.

In step S8, it is determined whether or not the result of the RWM backup failure determination process in step S3 is defective. This determination process is determined to be an RWM backup failure when an RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG. 18, which will be described later.

When it is determined that the backup state of the RWM is bad (YES in step S8), error processing (specifically, an E4 error) described in detail later with reference to FIG. 22 is performed (step S9). ). Then, the processing at the time of turning on the power is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup state of the RWM is not defective (NO in step S8), it is determined whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step). S10). If it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S10), the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is rotating (YES in step S10), the restart state of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R is set. (Step S11), and the process proceeds to step S12. Specifically, the process of returning the rotating reels of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to the state before the power failure is performed. When the power is turned on, the settings are made so that the current states of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R can be restored.

In step S12, a sensor error determination process (EA error), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20, is performed. Then, the processing at the time of turning on the power is completed.

1.1. RWM backup defect determination process The RWM backup defect determination process (step S3) of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines the checksum value (step S31). This is to determine whether or not the checksum value held at the time of power failure matches. If they do not match, it is determined that the backup is defective. In this checksum value, the data stored in the predetermined area of the RWM value is regarded as a string of integer values, the sum is obtained, and the remainder obtained by dividing by a predetermined constant is used as the inspection data.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines the power failure flag (step S32). This means that a predetermined numerical value determined in advance is stored at the time of power failure, and if the value is other than the predetermined value, it is determined that the power is cut in an abnormal state.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines the stack pointer (step S33). It determines the range of the stack pointer at the time of power failure, holds the address of the most recently referenced position, and if this address is outside the predetermined address range, it is in an abnormal state. It is judged as.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines the set value (step S34). Specifically, it determines whether or not the set value is within the range of 1 to 6. If it is out of the range, it is judged as an abnormal state.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines that the internal winning information is higher (step S35). This is to determine whether or not the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) in the winning combination lottery is within the range of the predetermined upper data. If the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) of the winning combination lottery is outside the range of the higher-level data determined in advance, it is determined as an abnormal state.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the backup of the RWM is defective (step S36). Based on the determination results of steps S31 to S35, it is determined whether or not the condition is abnormal, that is, whether or not the condition is defective. When it is determined that the state is not defective (NO in step S36), the process returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is defective (YES in step S36), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the RWM backup defect (step S37). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 clears all the contents of the RWM 65 regarding the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 (step S38). Here, the contents to be cleared are, for example, the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out for each of the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15, the cumulative PS, and the total cumulative total in FIG. In addition, it is the total number of games in total and the number of games in advantageous sections. In addition, it is the cumulative PS of FIG. 10, the total cumulative bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio. In addition, it is the advantageous section ratio of the total cumulative total in FIG. Further, it is the setting content of the display data of the thousands digit, the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69. Further, there are a 6000 arrival flag, a total number of games upper limit flag, and a total payout upper limit flag, which will be described later. Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

1.2. Initial setting process at power-on The initial setting process at power-on (step S4) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

The display control means 115 clears the ratio display number and sets the value to 0 (step S51). As a result, when the power is turned on, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is a display item corresponding to the ratio display number 0, is displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69.

Subsequently, the display control means 115 clears the ratio blinking flag and sets the value to 0 (step S52). As a result, some of the litable parts of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 (in the present embodiment, the litable parts DP (dot parts) of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit) are excluded. When the display content of the litable part is blinked, it starts from lit when the power is turned on.

Further, subsequently, the display control means 115 clears the dot lighting flag and sets the value to 0 (step S53). As a result, the display contents of a part of the litable parts of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 (in the present embodiment, the litable parts DP (dot parts) of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit) are displayed. When the power is turned on, it will start from lighting when the display is blinking.

Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the display switching timer (step S54). When a value corresponding to, for example, 5 seconds is set in the display switching timer, the display items (1) to (5) (see FIG. 12) displayed on the ratio display 69 are switched every 5 seconds. ..

Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the ratio blinking timer (step S55). When a value corresponding to, for example, 0.3 seconds is set in the ratio blinking timer, lighting and extinguishing are switched every 0.3 seconds.

Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets a dot blinking timer (step S56). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG. When a value corresponding to, for example, 0.1 seconds is set in the dot blinking timer, lighting and extinguishing are switched every 0.1 seconds. However, in the present embodiment, the dot blinking timer is set to a value smaller than the value set in the ratio blinking timer. As a result, the blinking interval of the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio indicator 69 becomes shorter than the blinking interval of the other littable portion of the ratio indicator 69 excluding the part of the littable portion. That is, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio indicator 69 is faster than the blinking speed of the other littable portion of the ratio indicator 69 except for the part of the littable portion.

1.3. Sensor error determination process The sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (step S71). When it is determined that neither of the selector sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S71), the process returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S71), the sensor error (EA error) flag is set in the error determination flag (step S72). This error determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to perform error notification by the sub CPU 71 for suspending the transition to error processing, a so-called reservation flag (hold flag). Based on this error determination flag, a transmission command "payout abnormality" or the like, which will be described later, is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

1.4. Setting change process The setting change process (step S7) of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

The setting control means 101 determines whether or not a backup failure of the RWM of the main CPU 61 is set (step S101). In this determination process, when the RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG. 18, it is determined that the RWM backup failure is set.

Then, when it is determined that the backup failure is not set (NO in step S101), the setting control means 101 reads the set value information (step S102) and proceeds to step S106.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a backup failure is set (YES in step S101), the payout display control means 118 performs display control to display "C" on the set value display 56 (step S103). Then, the setting control means 101 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is in the ON state (step S104). When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the ON state (NO in step S104), the standby state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the ON state (YES in step S104), the setting control means 101 sets the set value 1 (step S105), and proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, the setting control means 101 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is in the ON state. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the ON state (YES in step S106), the setting control means 101 updates the set value (step S107), and returns to step S106.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state (NO in step S106), the setting control means 101 determines whether or not the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is detected (NO). Step S108). If it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has not been detected (NO in step S108), the process returns to step S106. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is detected (YES in step S108), the setting control means 101 determines whether or not the setting change key switch 50b is in the off state (step S109). ). When it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the off state (NO in step S109), the standby state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the off state (YES in step S109), the setting control means 101 confirms the set value (step S110), and the setting change process ends.

1.5. Error processing The error processing (step S9) of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The error processing of FIG. 24 (step S233), the error processing of FIG. 25 (step S254), the error processing of FIG. 31 (step S411), and the error processing of FIG. 32 (step S441), which will be described later, are also the error processing of FIG. 22. Is done.

The game stop means 113 saves the current game state (step S131). Then, the game stopping means 113 sets an error flag corresponding to the error state (error state) that has occurred and transmits the error flag to the sub CPU 71 (step S132). Specifically, it is transmitted from the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub-control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71.

The game stopping means 113 saves the contents of the payout display 46 (step S133). The payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying an error code on the payout display 46 (step S134).

The game stopping means 113 saves the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S135), and turns off the settings of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S136).

The game stopping means 113 determines whether or not it is in an E4 error state (step S137). When it is determined that the state is in the E4 error state (YES in step S137), the process waits until the setting is changed (step S138).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S137 that it is not in the E4 error state (NO in step S137), the game stop means 113 determines whether or not it is in the E3 error state (step S139). If it is determined that the state is not in the E3 error state (NO in step S139), the process proceeds to step S141. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is in the E3 error state (YES in step S139), the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not the error release sensor is in the ON state (step S140). Since this step S140 causes an E3 error (hopper empty error), the error release sensor here is a door key reset. This door key reset is established by turning the key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. If it is determined that the error release sensor is in the ON state (YES in step S140), the process proceeds to step S143. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error release sensor is not in the ON state (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S141.

In step S141, the game stop means 113 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is in the ON state. The setting change button 50c here serves as a reset switch. If it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the ON state (NO in step S141), the process returns to step S137.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is in the ON state (YES in step S141), the game stop means 113 determines whether or not the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (Step S142). If it is determined that the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (YES in step S142), the process returns to step S137, and if it is determined that the door sensor 58 is not in the ON state (NO in step S142), the process proceeds to step S143.

In step S143, the game stop means 113 determines whether or not any of the selector sensors A, B, C, and the payout sensors A and B is in the ON state. When it is determined that any of the selector sensors A, B, C, the payout sensor A, and B is in the ON state (YES in step S143), the process returns to step S137, and the selector sensors A, B, C, the payout sensor A, If it is determined that none of B is in the ON state (NO in step S143), the process proceeds to step S144.

In step S144, the game stopping means 113 returns the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) to the original states (step S144). Then, the payout display control means 118 clears (initializes) the error code display (step S145). Further, the game stopping means 113 returns the contents of the payout display 46 (step S146) and returns the game state (step S147).

The main CPU 61 transmits an error release event (signal) to the sub CPU 71 (step S148), and determines transmission of the medal payout start event (signal) of the sub CPU 71 (step S149). Then, the error processing ends.

2. Main processing The main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. However, the main process is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

First, an overflow error determination process (E6 error), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 24, is performed (step S201). Specifically, this overflow error is detected by the overflow sensor 57a when the auxiliary tank arranged adjacent to the hopper unit 43 is full of medals.

It is determined whether or not a specified number of medals (three medals in the present embodiment) have been inserted (step S202), and a wait is made until it is determined that a specified number of medals have been inserted (NO in step S202). On the other hand, when it is determined that a predetermined number of medals have been inserted (YES in step S202), it is determined whether or not the start switch 19 has been operated (step S203). It waits until it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (NO in step S203), and when it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (YES in step S203), the lottery process by the winning combination lottery means 103 is executed (NO). Step S204).

Then, after the winning combination lottery process, rotation of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is started (step S205). If it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been operated (step S206), and if it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated (NO in step S206), the operation is performed. Wait until it is done. Then, when it is determined that the operation of the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been performed (YES in step S206), the stopped switch of the reel rotation by the stop control means 106 corresponds to the operated stop switch. The rotation of the reel is stopped (step S207).

The reel error determination process (E5 error), which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 25 (step S208).

After that, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped (step S209). Then, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S209), the process returns to step S206. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped (YES in step S209), the symbol determination means 109 determines the symbol (that is, the determination of winning). (Step S210).

Then, after the symbol determination process (winning determination process), the game information aggregation process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 26, is performed (step S211). Subsequently, the medal payout process is executed by the payout control means 110 as needed (step S212). The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. Then, the process returns to step S201.

Since the game information aggregation process is performed after the symbol determination process (winning determination process) and before the medal payout process, for example, even if the setting is suddenly changed during the payout of the game medium, the game is played. Information aggregation processing has already been performed. Therefore, the calculation result of performing a predetermined calculation using the aggregated data aggregated by the game information aggregation process (in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), the accessory ratio ( Game inspection information including (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative)) can be easily inspected or confirmed by an inspector, and for example, a setting change occurs unexpectedly while paying out a game medium. Even in this case, the total items can be accurately totaled.

2.1. Overflow error determination process The overflow error determination process (step S201) of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not an overflow error has occurred (step S231). Specifically, when the auxiliary tank is full of medals, the two overflow sensors 57a inserted in the auxiliary tank are energized, and the auxiliary tank is continuously energized for a predetermined time or longer. It is determined that an overflow error has occurred. When it is determined that no overflow error has occurred (NO in step S231), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG. 23.

On the other hand, when it is determined that an overflow error has occurred (YES in step S231), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error code "E6" (step S232). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 21 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S233), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG. 23.

2.2. Reel error determination process The reel error determination process (step S208) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R (rotating reels) have stopped rotating (step S251). When it is determined that all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped rotating (YES in step S251), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG. 23.

On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R has not stopped rotating (NO in step S251), the specific event detecting means 112 is the rotating reel (rotating reel). It is determined whether or not the rotation of is in a state of steady rotation, which is a state of rotating at a steady rotation speed (step S252). When it is determined that the rotation of the rotating reel is in the steady rotation state (YES in step S252), the process returns to step S251.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation of the rotating reel is not in the steady rotation state (NO in step S252), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error code "E5" (step S253). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S254).

Then, the main CPU 61 restarts the reel (rotary cylinder) (step S255). Specifically, the rotation is once stopped, and the rotation is started at a normal rotational acceleration to a normal rotational speed. It should be noted that the rotation speed may be set to a normal level without stopping once. Then, the main CPU 61 sets the ability to stop the reel (rotating cylinder) (step S256). That is, by setting the rotation stopability of the step, the reel stops at the position where it should stop without operating the stop switch. Then, the process returns to step S251.

2.3. Game Information Aggregation Process The game information aggregation process (step S211) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

The counting means 114a adds the number of winnings in this game to the total number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period of FIG. The 400 update process described in the above is performed (step S271).

The counting means 114a determines whether or not it is in the first-class accessory (for example, BB) (step S272). If it is determined that the product is not in the first-class accessory (NO in step S272), the process proceeds to step S274. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first-class accessory is in use (YES in step S272), the counting means 114a is a series of periods corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed using FIG. 27, in which the number of winnings in this game is added to the number of bonuses paid out (step S273). Then, the process proceeds to step S274.

In step S274, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not it is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (for example, CB). If it is determined that the product is in the first-class or second-class bonus (YES in step S274), the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the first-class accessory nor the second-class accessory is present (NO in step S274), the counting means 114a determines whether or not the member is in the ordinary accessory (for example, SB) (NO). Step S275). If it is determined that the product is in the normal character (YES in step S275), the process proceeds to step S276, while if it is determined that the product is not in the normal character (NO in step S275), the process proceeds to step S277.

In step S276, the counting means 114a adds the number of winnings in the current game to the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 27. The 400 update process described in detail later is performed using the device (step S276), and the process proceeds to step S277.

In step S277, whether or not the total number of games upper limit flag is 0 (that is, whether or not the total number of games is equal to or less than the maximum value of 4 bytes for storing the total total number of games of FIG. 10). Whether or not) is determined. If it is determined that the total number of games upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S277), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S277), the counting means 114a adds 1 to the total total number of games in FIG. The game number update process described in detail in the above is performed (step S278), and the process proceeds to step S279.

In step S279, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the control for turning on the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed (that is, whether or not the advantageous section is in the advantageous section). If it is determined that the control to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 is not performed (NO in step S279), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed (YES in step S279), the counting means 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games in FIG. The game number update process described in detail in the above is performed (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281.

In step S281, the aggregation means 114a sets 1 for the number of ratio calculations (step S281).

Subsequently, the counting means 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the 400 counter (game number counter 652) (step S282). Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the 400 counter is 400 (step S283). Then, when it is determined that the 400 counter is not 400 (NO in step S283), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG. 23. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 400 counter is 400 (YES in step S283), the counting means 114a resets the 400 counter to 0 and sets the ratio calculation number to 5 (step S284). That is, 5 is set for the number of ratio calculations for every 400 games, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio. (Cumulative) will be calculated, and in other games, 1 will be set for the number of ratio calculations and only the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) will be calculated.

Following step S284, the counting means 114a accumulates the total number of payouts from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result as the total number of payouts for the latest 6000 games in the cumulative PS. The 6000 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28, is performed every 400 games (step S285). Subsequently, the counting means 114a accumulates the number of continuous bonuses paid out from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of continuous bonuses paid out for the latest 6000 games. , The 6000 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28, is performed every 400 games (step S286). Further, the counting means 114a accumulates the number of bonuses paid out from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of bonuses paid out for the latest 6000 games. The 6000 update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29, is performed every 400 games (step S287).

Following step S287, the aggregation means 114a has a maximum value of 4 bytes for storing whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total total payout number is the total total payout number in FIG. 10). Whether or not it is the following) is determined (step S288). If it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S288), the process proceeds to step S292.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S288), the totaling means 114a is included in the total total number of payouts in FIG. 10 from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. The total number of total payouts is updated by adding the total number of payouts for the period corresponding to the ring pointer (total number of payouts for the last 400 games). , Every 400 games (step S289). Subsequently, the counting means 114a adds the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10 to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the latest 400 games). The cumulative update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30, is performed every 400 games (step S290), in which the total number of consecutive bonuses paid out is updated by adding the number of continuous bonuses paid out. Further, the counting means 114a adds the total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10 to the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the latest 400 games). The cumulative update process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30, is performed every 400 games (step S291), and the total cumulative number of bonuses paid out is updated by adding the number of bonuses paid out. move on.

In step S292, the aggregation means 114a updates the ring pointer (step S292). The ring pointer points in the order of 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, 3rd period P3, ..., 14th period P14, 15th period P15, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, and so on. That is, it is updated every 400 games so as to repeatedly point from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15.

The aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the ring pointer update result is 0, that is, whether or not the ring pointer has returned to the initial position (step S293). If it is determined that the ring pointer update result is not 0 (NO in step S293), the process proceeds to step S295. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ring pointer update result is 0 (YES in step S293), the counting means 114a has reached 6000 games since the installation or after clearing the RWM, so the 6000 arrival flag is set to $ FF. (Hexadecimal notation) is set (step S294), and the process proceeds to step S295. The 6000 arrival flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when the RWM is cleared.

The counting means 114a clears the total number of payouts (total number of payouts for the oldest 400 games) corresponding to the updated ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is set to 0 (step S295). Subsequently, the counting means 114a calculates the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 (the number of continuous bonuses paid out for the oldest 400 games). Clear and set the value to 0 (step S296). Further, the counting means 114a clears the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer (the number of bonuses paid out for the oldest 400 games) from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. To make the value 0 (step S297). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG.

2.3.1. 400 update process The 400 update process (steps S271, S273, S276) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

The counting means 114a acquires the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer (step S311), adds the number of winnings in the current game to the value of the acquired RWM address (step S312), and performs the game information totaling process of FIG. 26. Return to the processing procedure.

However, the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer is the total number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 in the 400 update process related to the total number of payouts in step S271. Is the address of the storage area in which the above is stored, and in the 400 update process related to the number of continuous accessory payouts in step S273, the continuous combination of the periods corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. It is the address of the storage area that stores the number of items to be paid out, and in the 400 update process related to the number of items to be paid out in step S276, the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 of FIG. This is the address of the storage area that stores the number of paid-out items.

2.3.2. Game Number Update Process The game number update process (steps S278, S280) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

Here, in the game number update process related to the total number of games in step 278, 4 bytes of the total total number of games in FIG. 10 is to be updated, and in the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number in step S280, FIG. 4 bytes of the total number of advantageous section games in total is to be updated.

The aggregation means 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM65 to be updated (step S331). Then, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the update result of the lower 2 bytes (that is, the value of the lower 2 bytes after the update) is 0 (step S332). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S332), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S332), the carry has occurred, so that the aggregation means 114a is the upper 2 of the 4 bytes of the RWM65 to be updated. The update process of adding 1 to the byte value is performed (step S333), and the process proceeds to step S334.

Then, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the update result of the upper two bytes (that is, the value of the upper two bytes after the update) is 0 (step S334). If it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S334), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S334), the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of 4 bytes before the update exceeds the ^{maximum value 232 -1 that can be expressed by 4 bytes.} Therefore, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total number of games upper limit flag (step S335). The total number of games upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when the RWM is cleared.

Following step S335, the aggregation means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) for each of the 1st to 4th bytes of the RWM65 to be updated (step S336), and the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26 is performed. Return to the processing procedure.

However, since the game number update process related to the total number of games and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed by the same subroutine, this subroutine is used even for a model that does not have a function related to the advantageous section. It is supposed to be executed. On the other hand, if the game number update process related to the total number of games and the game number update process related to the advantageous section games are performed by separate subroutines, in the case of a model that does not have the function related to the advantageous section. The subroutine for updating the number of games related to the number of games in the advantageous section is not executed, resulting in a so-called "unused program". However, in the present embodiment, since the game number update process related to the total number of games and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed by the same subroutine, this subroutine has a function related to the advantageous section. Even if the model is not used, it will not be an "unused program", and even if the model has different performance, the program can be diverted, and the burden on development can be reduced.

In addition, the process step of setting the total number of games upper limit flag is also included in the game number update process related to the number of advantageous section games, but the total number of games upper limit flag is first set in the game number update process related to the total number of games. $ FF (hexameric notation) will be set, and $ FF (hexaque notation) will not be set in the total game number upper limit flag in the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number.

2.3.3. 6000 update process The 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, S287) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

Here, in the 6000 update process relating to the total number of payouts in step S285, the RWM addresses of the storage areas (2 bytes) of the total number of payouts in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. 10 are sequentially added. It becomes the RWM address, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the total number of payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10 becomes the added address. Further, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in step S286, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of continuous bonuses paid out in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. The RWM addresses are sequentially added, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10 is the added address. Further, in the 6000 update process related to the number of bonuses paid out in step S287, the RWM addresses of the storage areas (2 bytes) of the number of bonuses paid out in each period from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. It becomes the added RWM address, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the cumulative PS accessory payout number in FIG. 10 becomes the added address.

The aggregation means 114a clears 3 bytes of the added RWM address and sets the value to 0 (step S351).

Since the accumulation target is 15 periods from the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15, the aggregation means 114a sets the number of repetitions to 15, and the 1st period of the 1st period P1 to the 15th period P15. The address of the storage area of P1 is used as the added RWM address (step S352).

Then, the aggregation means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of 2 bytes of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S353). Then, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result is carried on (that is, whether or not a carry has occurred) (step S354). Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is not a calion (NO in step S354), the process proceeds to step S356. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is calion (YES in step S354), the aggregation means 114a adds 1 to the value of the 3rd byte of the added RWM address to add 1 to the value of the 3rd byte of the added RWM address. Update (step S355) and proceed to step S356.

In step S356, the aggregation means 114a updates the addition RWM address. Here, the addition RWM address is updated so that, for example, the addition target is updated in the next period.

Following step S356, the counting means 114a subtracts 1 from the number of repetitions (step S357) and determines whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (step S358). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S358), the cumulative processing from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has not been completed, so the process returns to step S353. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S358), the cumulative processing from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has been completed. Return to the processing procedure. In this way, the values from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period are accumulated, and the accumulated result is stored in the accumulated PS.

2.3.4. Cumulative update process The cumulative update process (steps S289, S290, S291) in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 30.

The aggregation means 114a acquires the RWM address (additional RWM address) corresponding to the ring pointer (step S371). However, as the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer, in the cumulative update process related to the total number of payouts in step S289, the total number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the 15th period P15 in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the above is acquired, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in step S290, the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the above is acquired, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in step S291, the first period P1 to the first in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the period up to P15 in the 15th period will be acquired.

Following step S371, the aggregation means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S372). However, in the cumulative update process relating to the total number of payouts in step S289, the lower two bytes of the total cumulative number of payouts in FIG. 10 are the lower two bytes of the added RWM address, which relates to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in step S290. In the cumulative update process, the lower 2 bytes of the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10 are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address, and in the cumulative update process related to the cumulative number of bonuses paid out in step S291, FIG. The lower 2 bytes of the total number of bonuses paid out are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address.

Then, the aggregation means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S372 is a carryon, that is, whether or not a carry has occurred (step S373). When it is determined that the calculation result is not a carion (NO in step S373), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26. On the other hand, when the calculation result is determined to be a calion (YES in step S373), the aggregation means 114a updates the added RWM address (step S374). However, the added RWM address after the update is the address of the upper two bytes of the total cumulative number of payouts in FIG. 10 in the cumulative update process related to the total number of payouts in step S289, and the number of continuous bonuses paid out in step S290. In the cumulative update process according to FIG. 10, it is the address of the upper two bytes of the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10, and in the cumulative update process related to the total number of bonuses paid out in step S291, the total cumulative number of bonuses in FIG. This is the address of the top 2 bytes of the number of payouts.

Then, the aggregation means 114a updates the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding 1 to the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S375), and the update result in step S375 is 0. Whether or not (whether or not the value of the upper two bytes is 0) is determined (step S376). If it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S376), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is 0 (YES in step S376), the result of adding the 2-byte value of the added RWM to the 4-byte value before the update of the added RWM address is the maximum value of 4 bytes. since more than 2 ³² -1, aggregator 114a sets the $ FF (16 hexadecimal notation) the total payout limit flag (step S377). The total payout upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or when the RWM is cleared. Then, the aggregation means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) for each of the 1st to 4th bytes that were the update targets of the RWM65 (step S378), and the processing procedure of the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26. Return to.

2.4. Medal payout process The medal payout process (step S212) of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

The payout control means 110 determines whether or not the medal is paid out (step S401). If it is determined that no medals have been paid out (NO in step S401), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing of FIG. 23. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medals have been paid out (YES in step S401), the payout control means 110 determines whether or not the number of credit medals is 50 (step S402). If it is determined that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the process proceeds to step S408.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of credit medals is 50 (YES in step S402), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the determination time for the payout game medal out error (E3 error) (step S403). If the payout is not made even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the time counting (time counting) of the determination time for determining that the medal in the hopper unit 43 is empty is started.

The payout control means 110 performs rotation control to start rotation of the hopper motor 57 of the hopper unit 43 (step S404).

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the determination time for the payout game medal expiration error (E3 error) has elapsed (step S405). If it is determined that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the process proceeds to step S410.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination time has not elapsed (NO in step S405), the payout control means 110 determines whether or not one medal has been paid out (step S406). In this method, the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43 detects whether or not one medal has been paid out. Then, when it is determined that one medal has been paid out (YES in step S406), the process proceeds to the next step S407, and when it is determined that one medal has not been paid out (NO in step S406). , Return to step S404.

In step S407, the payout control means 110 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed. Then, when it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S407), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. 23, and when it is determined that the medal payout is not completed (NO in step S407). , Return to step S403.

When it is determined in the determination process in step S402 that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the payout control means 110 adds one to the number of credit medals (stored number) (step S408). .. As a result, the number of credit medals (stored number) displayed on the payout display 46 is increased by 1.

Following step S408, the payout control means 110 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (step S409). Then, when it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S409), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. 23, and when it is determined that the medal payout is not completed (NO in step S409). , Return to step S402.

When it is determined in the determination process in step S405 that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error code "E3" (step S410). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S411), and the process returns to step S403.

3. 3. Timer interrupt processing The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32. However, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

First, phase output processing is performed on each of the stepping motors as the left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (step S431). Specifically, excitation data for rotation of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is output to each of the stepping motors.

A command transmission process is performed from the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub-control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71 (step S432). Specifically, this command is a command transmission process normally transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71, and is actually transmitted from the sub control command transmission means 111 to the sub control command reception means 201. ..

In the power supply unit including the power supply switch 50a and the like, it is determined whether or not the power supply is cut off (power supply is cut off, that is, power supply is stopped) (step S433). When it is determined that the power is cut off (YES in step S433), the power cutoff process described in detail later is performed using FIG. 33 (step S434), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

When it is determined in the determination process in step S433 that the power is not turned off (NO in step S433), the lamp process is performed (step S435). Although not shown in particular, this lamp is a bet number display lamp, a replay display lamp, or the like, and is controlled and processed by the main CPU 61.

Then, the port input process is performed (step S436). This port input process performs sensors for the main CPU 61 (insertion sensor 53 of medal selector 48, payout sensor 54 and overflow sensor 57a of hopper unit 43, bet switch 15, maximum bet switch 17, left / middle / right stop switch 21L, 21M. , 21R, etc.).

After that, the use area external interrupt process, which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 35 (step S437).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a transmission command for transmitting from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S438). Then, when it is determined that there is no transmission command (NO in step S438), the process proceeds to step S440. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a transmission command (YES in step S438), the set transmission command (input abnormality in steps S564 and S570 in FIG. 36, which will be described in detail later, and payout in step S603 in FIG. 39). The transmission process (abnormality, door state of step S635 in FIG. 41) is performed (step S439), and the process proceeds to step S440.

In step S440, it is determined whether or not there is error data. This error data is a flag for notifying an error (shifting to error processing) in the main CPU 61, and when the error data is set (turned on), the main CPU 61 shifts to error processing. It is a thing. Specifically, it is set in steps S572 and S574 of FIG. 36, steps S607 and S611 of FIG. 39, and step S622 of FIG. 40, which will be described later.

When it is determined that the error data is set (in the ON state) (YES in step S440), the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 22 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S441). The timer interrupt process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error data is not set (not in the ON state) (NO in step S440), the medal insertion determination is performed (step S442), the medal payout determination is performed (step S443), and the medal payout determination is performed. The timer update process is performed (step S444), and the port output process is performed (step S445). Then, an external signal output process, which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 34 (step S446).

Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the ratio display settings (FIGS. 48 to 50) of step S536 of FIG. 35, which will be described later, in the thousands, hundreds, and tens of the ratio display 69. The display of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is controlled by using the set values of the ones place and the ones place (step S447). Then, the control processing of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R (rotary reel) is performed (step S448).

3.1. Power interruption processing The power interruption processing (step S434) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. However, the power interruption process of FIG. 33 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

The stack pointer is set (step S471). This holds the address of the most recently referenced position in the memory area called the stack. Following step S471, the power failure flag is set (step S472). It stores a predetermined numerical value determined in advance. Following step S472, the checksum value is set (step S473). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 32.

3.2. External signal output processing The external signal output processing (step S446) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. However, the external signal output process of FIG. 34 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

It is determined whether or not the door (specifically, the front door 5) is in the open state, that is, whether or not the door sensor 58 is OFF (step S501).

If it is determined that the front door 5 is in the closed state (NO in step S501), the process proceeds to step S503. On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S501), the external signal 5 output hold timer is set (step S502), and the process proceeds to step S503. Specifically, the counting (timekeeping) of the external signal 5 output hold timer is started. Here, the "output hold timer" is a timer for continuing to output a predetermined signal when the door (front door 5) is opened or a predetermined error occurs. Specifically, for example, when the door (front door 5) is opened, a timer is set for 3 seconds from the time when the door (front door 5) is opened, and even if the door (front door 5) shifts from the open state to the closed state during that time, it is for 3 seconds. The signal is set so that it does not turn off until the time of the timer has elapsed. As a result, even if the door (front door 5) is momentarily changed from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the door (front door 5) is once opened can be reliably output to the outside. Specifically, this signal output is output to the hall computer managed by the hall manager of the game hall by the external centralized terminal plate 59. The "hold timer" of the external signal 4 output hold timer, which will be described later, also has the same function.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating (step S503). When it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S503), the external signal 5 is turned on (step S504), and the process proceeds to step S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S503), the external signal 5 is turned off (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S506.

It is determined whether or not the specific conditions are met (step S506). Here, specifically, (1) E0 error, (2) E1 error, (3) E2 error, (4) E7 error, (5) EA error, and (6) E0 mean that the specific conditions are met. It means that it corresponds to any of (1) to (8) of (7) E2 error judgment flag on, (8) EA error judgment flag on. Here, (1) to (5) are due to regular error signals indicating a state in which an error corresponding to the error code has occurred, and the "error determination flags" in (6) to (8) are so-called reserved. It is a flag (holding flag).

If it is determined that none of the specific conditions is met (NO in step S506), the process proceeds to step S508. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the specific conditions is met (YES in step S506), the external signal 4 output hold timer is set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508. Specifically, the counting (timekeeping) of the external signal 4 output hold timer is started.

In step S508, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output hold timer is operating. When it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S508), the external signal 4 is turned on (step S509), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing processing procedure of FIG. 32. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S508), the external signal 4 is turned off (step S510), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG. 32.

3.3. The use area external interrupt process (step S437) of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. However, the use area external interrupt process of FIG. 35 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

The monitoring process of the selector sensor (specifically, the insertion sensor 53) of the medal selector 48, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 36, 37 and 38, is performed (step S531). Subsequently, the monitoring process of the payout sensor 54, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, is performed (step S532). Subsequently, a monitoring process for the door (specifically, the front door 5), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41, is performed (step S533).

Then, the ratio display-related timer update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed using FIG. 42 (step S534). Subsequently, each ratio calculation, which will be described in detail later, is performed using FIG. 43 (step S535). Subsequently, each ratio display setting, which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 48 (step S536). Then, the procedure returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG. 32.

33.1 Selector sensor monitoring process The selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37 and 38.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor C has time over (step S561). This is to make an E0 error (game medal error) in the selector sensor C if the ON state continues for 1.6 seconds. If it is determined that the selector sensor C is not time over (NO in step S561), the process proceeds to step S565.

On the other hand, when the selector sensor C is determined to be time over (YES in step S561), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the E0 error flag to the error determination flag (step S562). Then, the E0 error flag and the error determination flag are turned on (ON). This error determination flag is a flag that reserves (holds) that an error occurs and shifts to error processing. In addition, based on this error determination flag, "input abnormality", "payout abnormality", etc. of the transmission command described later are transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

Following step S562, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S563). If it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S563), the process proceeds to step S565. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S563), the specific event detecting means 112 is a command for transmitting from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. The medal "insertion abnormality" is set in (step S564), and the process proceeds to the next step S565.

In step S565, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S565). If it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S565), the process proceeds to step S567. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S565), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the medal is being paid out. (Step S566). If it is determined that the medal is being paid out (YES in step S566), the process proceeds to step S567, and if it is determined that the medal is not being paid out (NO in step S566), the process proceeds to step S571.

In step S567, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B as the closing sensor 53 is in the ON state. When it is determined that neither of the selector sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S567), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S567), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the EA error (sensor error) flag in the error determination flag (step S568). This error determination flag is a flag that reserves the process of shifting to error processing when an error occurs.

Following step S568, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S569). When it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S569), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S569), the specific event detecting means 112 is a command for transmitting from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. The medal "insertion abnormality" is set in (step S570), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

In step S571, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the E0 error (game medal error) flag is on. When it is determined that the E0 error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S571), the error determination flag of the E0 error is cleared, and in step S572, the specific event detecting means 112 obtains error data by the error code "E0". Set (error data flag is set to on state). When this error data is set, it means that the flag of the error data is turned on, and that the flag for shifting to the error processing in the main CPU 61 is turned on. Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the E0 error flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S571), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the EA error (sensor error) flag is in the ON state (Step S573). .. When it is determined that the EA error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S573), the error determination flag of the EA error is cleared, and in step S574, the specific event detecting means 112 obtains error data by the error code "EA". Set (the error data flag is set to the on state). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the EA error flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S573), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the cancel coil is in the ON state (step S575). Although this cancel coil is not particularly shown, in the medal selector 48, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 is inserted into the hopper unit 43 side to obtain a credit medal, or is discharged to the medal receiver 41. This is for switching the medal passage to be made to. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 is adopted as a credit medal when the cancel coil is in the ON state, and is discharged to the medal receiver 41 when the cancel coil is not in the ON state.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S575 that the cancel coil is not in the ON state (NO in step S575), the process proceeds to step S567 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cancel coil is in the ON state (YES in step S575), the specific event detecting means 112 is in a state where the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in a falling state (a state in which the timing chart is changed from the ON state to the OFF state). It is determined whether or not there is (step S576). The falling state of the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which the medal has passed in front of the selector sensor B and is about to pass by in the passage.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S576 that the state is in the falling state (YES in step S576), the process proceeds to step S577. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the falling state (NO in step S576), the process proceeds to step S579.

In step S577, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. However, since the selector sensors A, B, and C are arranged so as to detect the medal in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B, the medals are not detected in that order. Is determined to be abnormal.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S577 that the order of passing medals is abnormal (YES in step S577), the process proceeds to step S574 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S577), the specific event detecting means 112 clears (initializes) the EA timer (step S578), and interrupts the use area for external use in FIG. 35. Return to the processing procedure of processing.

In step S579, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the falling state (the state of shifting from the on state to the off state). The state in which the timing chart of the selector sensor A is falling means a state in which the medal has passed in front of the selector sensor A and is about to pass.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S579 that the state is not in the falling state (NO in step S579), the process proceeds to step S581 of FIG. 38. On the other hand, if it is determined that the vehicle is in the falling state (YES in step S579), the process proceeds to step S580.

In step S580, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. If it is determined that the medal passing order is abnormal (YES in step S580), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. 36, and if it is determined that the medal passing order is not abnormal (NO in step S580), FIG. 38 The process proceeds to step S585.

In step S581 of FIG. 38, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the rising state (transition state from the off state to the on state). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which the medal has moved to the front of the selector sensor B in the passage.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S581 that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the rising state (YES in step S581), the process proceeds to step S582. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is not in the rising state (NO in step S581), the process proceeds to step S584.

In step S582, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. If it is determined that the passing order of the medals is abnormal (YES in step S582), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S582), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the EA timer (step S583), and the processing procedure of the interrupt process for external use in FIG. 35 Return to.

In step S584, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the rising state (step S584). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor A means a state in which the medal has moved to the front of the selector sensor A in the passage.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S584 that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is not in the rising state (NO in step S584), the process proceeds to step S585. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the rising state (YES in step S584), the process proceeds to step S586.

In step S585, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the EA timer has reached 0 after a predetermined time has elapsed (countdown, subtraction). If it is determined that the EA timer is 0 (YES in step S585), the process proceeds to step S574 of FIG. 36, and if it is determined that the EA timer is not 0 (NO in step S585), FIG. 35 Return to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use of.

In step S586, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not 500 ms or more has passed since the selector sensor C was turned off. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (YES in step S586), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (NO in step S586), the process proceeds to step S587.

In step S587, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the passing order of medals is abnormal. If it is determined that the passing order of the medals is abnormal based on the detection order of the selector sensors A, B, and C (YES in step S587), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S587), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the EA timer (step S588), and the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35 Return to.

3.3.2 Payout sensor monitoring process The payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S601). If it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating, that is, if it is determined that all the reels have stopped rotating (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S604. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. Then, when it is determined that neither of the payout sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S602), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the medal "payout abnormality" in the command for transmission from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. (Step S603), and the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the E2 error flag as the error determination flag is in the ON state. Then, when it is determined that the E2 error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S604), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the E2 error flag is not in the on state, that is, in the off state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S605, the specific event detecting means 112 sets the E2 error flag to the error determination flag. That is, the error determination flag is set to the ON state depending on the ON state of the E2 error flag.

Following step S605, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S606). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S606), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating, that is, stopped (NO in step S606), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error determination flag for the E2 error. Is cleared, the error code E2 is set to the error data used in the main CPU 61 (step S607), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

In step S608, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the determination time of the error code E7 has just elapsed. If it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has just passed (YES in step S608), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has not elapsed (NO in step S608), the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S609, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hopper motor 57 is being driven to rotate. If it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S609), the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S610, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor B is in the ON state. Then, when it is determined that the payout sensor B is in the ON state (YES in step S610), the process proceeds to step S612. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor B is not in the ON state (NO in step S610), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error data used for the main CPU 61 by the error code "E7" (step S611). The process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

In step S612, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. If it is determined that the payout sensors A and B are not in the ON state (NO in step S612), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S612), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, the hopper motor. It is determined whether or not 57 is being driven in rotation (step S613).

If it is determined in the determination process of step S613 that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S613), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S613), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor A is in the rising state (transition state from the off state to the on state). (Step S614). When it is determined to be in the rising state (YES in step S614), the specific event detecting means 112 sets the E1 timer (starts the countdown (timekeeping) of the E1 timer) (step S615), and uses the area of FIG. 35. Return to the processing procedure of the external interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the rising state (NO in step S614), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG.

In step S616 of FIG. 40, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, whether or not the hopper motor 57 is being driven to rotate. When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S616), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S616), the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not both the payout sensors A and B are in the off state after the determination time of the error code E7 has elapsed. Is determined (step S617). If it is determined that both are in the off state (YES in step S617), the process proceeds to step S622. On the other hand, when it is determined that both are not in the off state, that is, at least one is in the on state (NO in step S617), the specific event detecting means 112 elapses (counts down (subtracts)) a predetermined time with the E1 timer. It is determined whether or not the remaining time is 0 (step S618). If it is determined that the E1 timer is 0 (YES in step S618), the process proceeds to step S622.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the E1 timer is not 0 (NO in step S618), is the payout sensor A in the falling state (the state of shifting from the on state to the off state) in the specific event detecting means 112? It is determined whether or not (step S619). When it is determined that the state is not in the falling state (NO in step S619), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that the user is in the falling state (YES in step S619), the specific event detecting means 112 clears (initializes) the E1 timer (step S620). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 causes the payout sensor B to fall between the rising state (the state of shifting from the off state to the on state) and the falling state (the state of shifting from the on state to the off state) of the payout sensor A. It is determined whether or not a state (a state of transitioning from an on state to an off state) has occurred (step S621). When it is determined that the falling state has occurred (YES in step S621), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, if it is determined that the falling state has not occurred (NO in step S621), the process proceeds to step S622.

In step S622, the specific event detecting means 112 sets the error data used in the main CPU 61 according to the error code “E1” (step S622). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

3.3.3 Door monitoring process The door monitoring process of FIG. 35 (step S533) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. However, the door monitoring process of FIG. 41 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

The monitoring hold timer of the door (front door 5) determines whether or not a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed (step S631). If it is determined that the elapse has not occurred (NO in step S631), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use of the used area shown in FIG. 34. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lapse has passed (YES in step S631), the state of the door (front door 5) is acquired (step S632).

Following step S632, it is determined whether or not the state of the acquired door (front door 5) is different from the previously acquired door (front door 5) information (step S633). If it is determined that the information does not differ from the information (NO in step S633), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the information is different (YES in step S633), the state of the door (front door 5) is updated (step S634). Then, the door (front door 5) state is set in the transmission command for transmitting from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S635). Then, the door (front door 5) monitoring hold timer is set (step S636). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

3.3.4 Ratio display-related timer update process The ratio display-related timer update process (step S534) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

The display control means 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the ratio blinking timer (step S651). Subsequently, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the update result (value of the ratio blinking timer after the update) is 0 or more (step S652). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S652), the process proceeds to step S654. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S652), the display control means 115 inverts the ratio blinking flag and sets the ratio blinking timer to the ratio blinking timer in step S55 of FIG. The same value as is set (step S653), and the process proceeds to step S654. The processing of steps S651 to S653 is executed every time the use area external interrupt processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing, and the ratio blinking flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.3 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the ratio blinking timer. Switch between. As a result, other litable parts excluding some litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 (in the present embodiment, litable parts DP (dot parts) for each of the ones, tens, and thousandss). Blinking display can be controlled.

In step S654, the display control means 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the display switching timer (step S654). Subsequently, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the update result is 0 or more (step S655). When it is determined that the update result of the display switching timer (value of the display switching timer after the update) is 0 or more (YES in step S655), the process proceeds to step S657. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S655), the display control means 115 updates the ratio display number and sets the display switching timer to the display switching timer in step S54 of FIG. The same value as is set (step S656), and the process proceeds to step S657. In this ratio display number update process, the ratio display number is updated while repeating 0 to 4 in order, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 1, .... The ratio display number 0 is the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio display number 1 is the display item (2) continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), and the ratio display number 2 is the display item (3) accessory. The ratio (6000 games), the ratio display number 3 corresponds to the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the ratio display number 4 corresponds to the display item (5) accessory ratio (cumulative) (see FIG. 12). Then, the processes of steps S654 to S656 are executed every time the interrupt process for external use of the used area in the timer interrupt process is executed, and the ratio display number is updated according to the set value of the display switching timer, for example, every 5 seconds. .. As a result, the display contents of the ratio display 69 are displayed as display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), display item (2) continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), display item (3) accessory ratio (6000 games). , Display items (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative), (5) Character ratio (cumulative), and so on.

The display control means 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the dot blinking timer (step S657). Subsequently, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the update result (value of the dot blinking timer after the update) is 0 or more (step S658). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S658), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S658), the display control means 115 inverts the dot blinking flag and sets the dot blinking timer to the dot blinking timer in step S56 of FIG. The same value as is set (step S659), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. The processing of steps S657 to S659 is executed every time the use area external interrupt processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing, and the dot blinking flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.1 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the dot blinking timer. Switch between. As a result, it is possible to control the blinking display of a part of the litable part of the ratio indicator 69 (in the present embodiment, the litable part DP (dot part) of each of the ones place, the tens place, and the thousands place). Become.

3.3.5 Calculation of each ratio Each ratio calculation of FIG. 35 (step S535) will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

The calculation means 114b determines whether or not the number of ratio calculations is 0 (step S671). When it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is 0 (YES in step S671), all of the types of ratios corresponding to the number of ratio calculations finally set in the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26 are calculated. Therefore, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. That is, in the game information aggregation process of FIG. 26, when the ratio calculation number is finally set to 1, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is already calculated, and when the ratio calculation number is set to 5, the accessory is used. The ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and advantageous section ratio (cumulative) have already been calculated.

When it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is not 0 (NO in step S671), the calculation means 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of ratio calculations (step S672). Subsequently, the calculation means 114b acquires data corresponding to the value of the number of ratio calculations from the ratio calculation data table (step S673).

Here, in the present embodiment, the data table for ratio calculation is associated with "number of ratio calculations", "division information", "division bytes", "division information", and "division bytes". It is a table to memorize.

Then, as the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number of times "0", the divisor information "total number of games" (total total number of games in FIG. 10), the number of bytes of the divisor "4", and the information of the divisor "advantageous section games" "(The total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes of the division number" 4 "are stored in association with each other. Then, using FIG. 45, the number of bytes of the divided number “4” acquired is set for the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later.

As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number of times "1", the divisor information "total number of payouts in the latest 6000 games" (total number of payouts of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), the number of bytes of the divisor "3", and the information of the division "latest 6000" The number of continuous bonuses paid out in the game (the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10) and the number of bytes to be divided "3" are stored in association with each other. Then, using FIG. 45, the number of bytes of the divided number “3” acquired is set for the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later.

As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number "2", the divisor information "total number of payouts in the latest 6000 games" (total number of payouts of cumulative PS in FIG. 10), the number of bytes of the divisor "3", and the information of the division "latest 6000" The number of bonuses paid out in the game (the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes to be divided "3" are stored in association with each other. Then, using FIG. 45, the number of bytes of the divided number “3” acquired is set for the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later.

As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number "3", the divisor information "total number of payouts in the cumulative game" (total total number of payouts in FIG. 10), the number of bytes of the divisor "4", and the information of the division "in the cumulative game" The number of continuous bonuses paid out (the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes to be divided "4" are stored in association with each other. Then, using FIG. 45, the number of bytes of the divided number “4” acquired is set for the number of repetitions in the 100 times processing described later.

As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number of times "4", the divisor information "total number of payouts in the cumulative game" (total total number of payouts in FIG. 10), the number of bytes of the divisor "4", and the information of the division "in the cumulative game" The "number of bonuses paid out" (total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) and the number of bytes to be divided "4" are stored in association with each other. Then, using FIG. 45, the number of bytes of the divided number “4” acquired is set for the number of repetitions in the 100-fold processing described later.

Following step S673, the calculation means 114b performs a ratio calculation process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44, for calculating the ratio corresponding to the value of the number of ratio calculations (step S674). However, the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number "0" is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number "1" is the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the ratio calculation number "2". The ratio corresponding to is the bonus ratio (6000 games), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count "3" is the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation count "4" is the bonus ratio. (Cumulative). This ratio calculation process is applied when the divisor and the divisor can exceed 2 bytes because the calculation load is reduced when the divisor and the divisor can exceed 2 bytes. Is preferable.

Following step S674, the calculation means 114b sets a value stored in the ratio display work area (described later) in the ratio buffer corresponding to the number of ratio calculations by the ratio calculation process of step S674 (step S675), and FIG. 35 Return to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use of. However, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number "0" is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio of the total cumulative total in FIG. 10). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number of times "1" is a buffer for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) (1 byte storage area corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and the ratio calculation. The ratio buffer corresponding to the number of times "2" is a buffer for the accessory ratio (6000 games) (1 byte storage area corresponding to the cumulative PS accessory ratio in FIG. 10). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation count "3" is a buffer for the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) (1 byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous bonus ratio in FIG. 10), and the ratio calculation count. The ratio buffer corresponding to “4” is a buffer for the accessory ratio (cumulative) (1 byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. 10).

Here, before explaining the details of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 by using the flowchart of FIG. 44 or the like, the outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 will be outlined with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. A specific example will be described. Regarding bits, the least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and regarding bytes, the least significant byte is described as the 1st byte.

In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 52, both the divisor A and the divisor B are 4-byte information, the divisor A is $ 000B71B0 in hexadecimal notation (750000 in decimal notation), and the divisor B is in hexadecimal notation. Then it is $ 00130B0 (78000 in decimal notation). However, as shown in FIG. 52, the divisor is stored in the 1st to 4th bytes of the divisor RWM by using the calculation work area of the 1st to 5th bytes and the A register (only 1 bit for calculation assistance). ing. The division number RWM in which the division number is stored is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 52, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the divisor A to the divisor B is calculated by dividing the divisor B by the divisor A and multiplying the division result (B ÷ A) by 100 (B ÷ A). A × 100). In the present embodiment, considering that the arithmetic processing of the decimal point is complicated, it is calculated by multiplying the divisor B by 100 and dividing the result (B × 100) of 100 times by the divisor A (B × 100 ÷ A). ..

First, with reference to FIG. 53, a process of multiplying the dividend B by 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 53 illustrates how to calculate 78000 × 100 in decimal.

Multiply the value of the first byte of the dividend B by $ B0 (hexadecimal notation) by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the higher byte $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the multiplication result $ 44C0 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the H register. In addition, the lower byte $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register is stored in the D register, and $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register is stored in the first byte of the calculation work area.

Then, the value of the second byte of the dividend B is multiplied by $ 30 (hexadecimal notation) by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the upper byte of the multiplication result $ 12C0 (hexadecimal notation) is $ 12 (hexadecimal notation). Is stored in the H register, and the lower byte $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 04 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the second byte of the calculation work area. It is stored, the carry amount of $ 01 (hexadecimal notation) is added to $ 12 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register, and the addition result $ 13 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the D register.

Then, the value of the third byte of the dividend B is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) by $ 01 (hexadecimal notation), and the upper byte of the multiplication result $ 0064 (hexadecimal notation) is $ 00 (hexadecimal notation). Is stored in the H register, and the lower byte $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 13 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 77 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the third byte of the calculation work area. Store and store $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) in the H register in the D register.

Then, the value of the fourth byte of the dividend B is multiplied by $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the upper byte of the multiplication result of $ 0000 (hexadecimal notation) is $ 00 (hexadecimal notation). Is stored in the H register, and the lower byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the fourth byte of the calculation work area. Store and store $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) in the H register in the D register.

Then, since all the bytes of the division B are multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), the value of the D register is stored in the 5th byte of the calculation work area.

As described above, in the case of hexadecimal multiplication, the calculation is performed in 1-byte units based on the same concept of long division as decimal numbers. Multiply by 100 times (multiply by $ 64 in hexadecimal notation) in order from the first byte of the dividend B, and add by shifting the calculation result of 2 bytes by 1 byte to multiply multiple bytes by 100 times ($ 64 in hexadecimal notation). It can be multiplied by 64). At this time, since the maximum calculation result is $ FF × $ 64 = $ 639C (hexadecimal notation), there is no overflow when adding the carry amount. The addition result is saved in the calculation work area in order from the first byte, and the calculation result is obtained by adding 1 to the number of calculation bytes.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58, a process of dividing a value (B × 100) obtained by multiplying the divisor B by 100 by the divisor A will be described.

Here, when the divisor B is divisor A or less, when the divisor B is multiplied by 100 and the result (B × 100) multiplied by 100 is divided by the divisor A, the quotient is always 100 (decimal notation) or less. Therefore, in binary notation, the quotient is a 1-byte value and the 7th bit is always 0. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54, in the decimal notation, the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit (that is, the “*” part in FIG. 54) may be calculated as the quotient value. In binary notation, 7 bits from the 6th bit to the 0th bit (that is, the "*" part in FIG. 54) may be calculated as the quotient value. Further, in the decimal notation, when calculating the quotient value, it is sufficient to calculate from the hundreds digit and to the ones digit, and in the binary notation, when calculating the quotient value, the quotient value is calculated. It may be calculated from the 6th bit and up to the 0th bit.

In decimal notation, when calculating the value of the hundreds digit of the quotient, "78000" is taken out as a subtraction judgment part as shown in FIG. 55, and the subtraction judgment part "78000" is a divisor "750000" as shown in FIG. Find the value of the hundreds digit of the quotient by comparing with.

Similarly, in the binary notation, when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 55, the part necessary for calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient is subtracted and determined (A register). The bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area are shifted to the left (upper bit side) by 2 bits in order to shift to the least significant bit and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the arithmetic work area. To do. As a result, the subtraction determination part (A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is changed from the 6th bit in the 5th byte of the calculation work area before the 2-bit shift to 6 in the 1st byte of the calculation work area. It will be up to the bit.

However, the result of multiplying the 4-byte maximum value $ FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal notation) by 100 is $ 63FFFFFF9C (hexadecimal notation), which is 01100011 11111111 11111111 11111111 10011100 in binary notation. In this way, since the most significant bit of the 5th byte in binary notation is 0, even when shifting the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area by 2 bits, only the least significant bit of the A register is displayed. If used, the information of the result (B × 100) obtained by multiplying the divisor B by 100 will not be lost.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the 6th bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the sixth bit of the quotient.

In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 56, the subtraction determination portion "000000000000000000001 11011100 00010011" is compared with the divisor "00000000000000000111 01110001 10110000", and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion. Is set to "1", and "0" with the carry flag inverted is stored in the 6th bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the 6th bit of the quotient. If this subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination part (5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is left as it is.

If the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part, the carry flag becomes "0", and the inverted carry flag "1" is set as the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, which is 6 in the ratio display work area. Remember the bit. When this subtraction is possible, the values of the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area are replaced with the values obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination portion.

Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. Here, when calculating the tens digit in decimal notation, the work of lowering the tens digit "0" of 7800000 is performed as shown in FIG. 57. Similarly, when calculating the 5th bit of the quotient in binary notation, the work of lowering the 5th bit of the divisor B × 100 is performed. Specifically, in binary notation, when calculating the value of the 5th bit of the quotient, the part necessary for calculating the value of the 5th bit of the quotient is the subtraction judgment part (the least significant bit of the A register and the calculation). In order to shift from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the work area), the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area are shifted 1 bit to the left (upper bit side). As a result, the subtraction determination part (A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is changed from the 7th bit in the 5th byte of the calculation work area before the 1-bit shift to 7 in the 1st byte of the calculation work area. It will be up to the bit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the 5th bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination portion “0000000000000000000111 101111000 00100110” is compared with the divisor “0000000000 0000011011 01110001 10110000”, and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion. Is "1", and "0" with the inverted carry flag is stored in the 5th bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the 5th bit of the quotient. If this subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination part (5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is left as it is.

If the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part, the carry flag becomes "0", and the inverted carry flag "1" is set as the value of the 5th bit of the quotient, which is 5 in the ratio display work area. Remember the bit. When this subtraction is possible, the values of the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area are replaced with the values obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination portion.

Similarly, the values of the 4th bit, the 3rd bit, the 2nd bit, the 1st bit, and the 0th bit of the quotient are calculated.

The calculation result is shown in FIG. 58. In this way, the shift process (digit down process) and the subtraction determination are repeated 7 times in total from the upper part of the 1st byte of the calculation work area, and the 0th bit from the 6th bit of the quotient is derived. Finally, the value of the ratio display work area becomes the quotient, and the values from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area become the remainder.

If the remainder is not 0, the result of division is determined to be larger than the value of the quotient and smaller than the value obtained by adding 1 (value in binary notation) to the quotient, and if the remainder is 0, the remainder is divided. The result can be used to determine that it is the same as the value of the quotient.

When the divisor A is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, the divisor B is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, and the value of the divisor B is less than or equal to the value of the divisor A, the arithmetic means 114b is a divisor of the value of the divisor B. It has a function to calculate the ratio (percentage) to the value of A, performs a multiplication process that multiplies the value of the division B by 100, and holds the result of the multiplication process (value of B × 100) in the calculation work area. , When the value of the dividend B × 100 is divided by the value of the divisor A, the division process for calculating only the lower 7 bits as a quotient is performed, and the result of the division process (value of B × 100 ÷ A) is used for displaying the ratio. Hold in the work area. In the division process, the calculation means 114b calculates each of the bit values from the 6th bit to the 0th bit in the lower 7 bits as 1 when the subtracted value is equal to or greater than the subtracted value, and when the subtracted value is less than the subtracted value. Is calculated as 0. When the value of the divisor A is a K (K is a natural number) bit, the subtraction value is a value represented by the K bits from the (K-1) th bit to the 0th bit of the divisor A value, and is 6 bits. The subtracted value in the eye is a value represented by the (K + 1) bits from the (K + 6) bit to the 6th bit of the value of the divisor B × 100, and the subtracted value in the i (i = 0 to 5) bit. When the value of the (i + 1) bit in the division result obtained by dividing the value of the divisor B × 100 by the value of the divisor A is 0, the value is the lower K bits of the subtracted value in the (i + 1) bit. It is a value represented by (K + 1) bits in which the i-th bit of the value of the divisor B × 100 is the least significant bit as well as the upper K bits, and the value of the divisor B × 100 is divided by the value of the divisor A. When the value of the (i + 1) bit in the division result is 1, the lower K bits of the value obtained by subtracting the subtracted value from the subtracted value in the (i + 1) bit are set as the upper K bits, and the divided number B is used. It is a value represented by (K + 1) bits having the i-th bit of the value of × 100 as the lowest bit.

Subsequently, the outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 with reference to other specific examples. However, in the specific example of FIG. 59, the divisor A is 0 (decimal notation) and the divisor B is 0 (decimal notation).

The value of the division B is $ 00000000
The multiplication result obtained by multiplying (hexadecimal notation) by 100 is $ 000000000000 (hexadecimal notation).

First, the value of the 6th bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. In binary notation, when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 59, the part necessary for calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient is the subtraction determination part (the lowest bit of the A register). In order to shift from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the arithmetic work area), the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area are shifted 2 bits to the left (upper bit side). As a result, the subtraction determination part (A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is changed from the 6th bit in the 5th byte of the calculation work area before the 2-bit shift to 6 in the 1st byte of the calculation work area. It will be up to the bit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the 6th bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the sixth bit of the quotient.

In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination portion "0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000" is compared with the divisor "00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000", and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion. Is set to "0", and "1" with the carry flag inverted is stored in the 6th bit of the work area for ratio display as the value of the 6th bit of the quotient. When this subtraction is possible, the values of the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area are replaced with the values obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination portion.

Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. When calculating the 5th bit of the quotient in binary notation, the part required to calculate the value of the 5th bit of the quotient is the subtraction judgment part (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th byte of the calculation work area). In order to shift from to the 2nd byte), the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the calculation work area are shifted 1 bit to the left (upper bit side). As a result, the subtraction determination part (A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is changed from the 7th bit in the 5th byte of the calculation work area before the 1-bit shift to 7 in the 1st byte of the calculation work area. It will be up to the bit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the 5th bit of the quotient. If subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and if subtraction is not possible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 59, the subtraction determination portion "0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000" is compared with the divisor "00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000", and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion. Is set to "0", and "1" with the carry flag inverted is stored in the 5th bit of the ratio display work area as the value of the 5th bit of the quotient. When this subtraction is possible, the values of the 5th to 2nd bytes of the calculation work area are replaced with the values obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination portion.

Similarly, the values of the 4th bit, the 3rd bit, the 2nd bit, the 1st bit, and the 0th bit of the quotient are calculated. As shown in FIG. 59, the result of this calculation is that the quotient value is 01111111 in binary notation, $ 7F in hexadecimal notation, and 127 in decimal notation. The remainder is 00000000000 in binary notation, $ 00 in hexadecimal notation, and 0 in decimal notation.

As described above, when the value of the divisor B is less than or equal to the value of the divisor A, the quotient is as shown in FIG. 59, considering that the ratio (percentage) of the divisor B to the divisor A is 100 or less in decimal notation. If it exceeds 100 in decimal notation, the work area for displaying the ratio is cleared and the value is set to 0.

3.35.1 Ratio calculation process The ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. However, when the number of ratio calculations is 0, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is calculated, when the number of ratio calculations is 1, the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is calculated, and when the number of ratio calculations is 2. The bonus ratio (6000 games) is calculated, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) is calculated when the ratio calculation count is 3, and the bonus ratio (cumulative) is calculated when the ratio calculation count is 4. To.

The calculation means 114b clears the fifth byte of the calculation work area (see FIG. 52) and the ratio display work area to set the value to 0 (step S701).

The calculation means 114b performs a 100-fold process of multiplying the RWM65 value (RWM value) corresponding to the divisor information acquired in step S673 of FIG. 43 by 100, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 (step). S702). However, when the number of ratio calculations is 0, the value of the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10 is multiplied by 100, and when the number of ratio calculations is 1, the value of the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10 is 100. When the ratio calculation count is 2, the value of the cumulative PS bonus payout number in FIG. 10 is multiplied by 100, and when the ratio calculation count is 3, the total cumulative bonus payout value in FIG. 10 is When it is multiplied by 100 and the number of ratio calculations is 4, the value of the total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10 is multiplied by 100.

The calculation means 114b acquires the first byte and the second byte of the RWM 65 corresponding to the divisor information acquired in step S673 of FIG. 43 (step S703). Then, the calculation means 114b determines whether or not the number of calculation bytes is 3 (step S704). In this embodiment, the number of arithmetic bytes is 3 or 4. When the number of arithmetic bytes is not 3, that is, when it is determined that the number of arithmetic bytes is 4 (NO in step S704), the arithmetic means 114b acquires the 4th byte of the divisor RWM (step S705) and divisors. The third byte of the RWM is acquired (step S706), and the process proceeds to step S707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of calculation bytes is 3 (YES in step S704), the calculation means 114b acquires the third byte of the divisor RWM (step S706), and proceeds to step S707.

However, the divisor RWM is a 4-byte storage area that stores the total total number of games in FIG. 10 when the number of ratio calculations is 0, and the total payout of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10 when the number of ratio calculations is 1. It is a 3-byte storage area for storing the number of sheets, and when the number of ratio calculations is 2, it is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of cumulative PS payouts in FIG. 10. When the number of ratio calculations is 3, FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total total number of payouts, and when the number of ratio calculations is 4, it is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total total number of payouts in FIG.

The calculation means 114b sets the number of repetitions to 7 (step S707). The reason for setting 7 for the number of repetitions is as follows. In the ratio calculation, the value of the divisor is less than or equal to the value of the divisor, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the divisor by 100 is divided by the value of the divisor. It can be represented by the lower 7 bits (7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit). Therefore, it is only necessary to calculate the lower 7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit in binary notation as the value of the quotient.

Using FIG. 46, the calculation means 114b shifts the data to be the subtraction determination portion from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the calculation work area when the number of repetitions is 7 set in step S707. The shift process described in detail later is performed twice (steps S708 and S709). This is a process corresponding to a 2-bit shift when calculating the value of the sixth bit of the quotient of FIG. 55.

Further, when the number of repetitions is 1 to 6 other than 7 set in step S707 (when it is determined in step S718 described later that the number of repetitions is not 0), the calculation means 114b uses data as a subtraction determination portion. The shift process of shifting from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the calculation work area, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 46, is performed once (step S709). This is, for example, a process corresponding to a 1-bit shift when calculating the value of the 5th bit of the quotient of FIG. 55.

Following step S709, the arithmetic means 114b stores the number of repetitions and the divisor in the RWM 65 (step S710).

Following step S710, the calculation means 114b uses the data of the subtraction determination portion (data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the A register and the calculation work area) to the divisor data (the 4th to 1st bytes of the divisor RWM). The subtraction process described in detail later is performed with reference to FIG. 47 (step S711). When the number of bytes of the divisor is 3 bytes (for example, the total number of cumulative PS payouts in FIG. 10), the value of the 4th byte of the divisor RWM is $ 00 (hexadecimal notation).

In step S712, the calculation means 114b determines whether or not the calculation result in step S711 is a calion (step S712). When it is determined that the calculation result is a carryon (that is, when the data of the subtraction determination portion is not greater than or equal to the divisor data) (YES in step S712), the process proceeds to step S714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is not a calion (that is, when the data of the subtraction determination portion is equal to or greater than the divisor data) (NO in step S712), the calculation means 114b determines the calculation result of step S711 (subtraction determination portion). The result of subtracting the divisor data from the data of (step S713) is set from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area (step S713), and the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S714, the calculation means 114b inverts the carry flag. However, if the divisor data can be subtracted from the subtraction judgment part data (that is, if the subtraction judgment part data is greater than or equal to the divisor data), the carry flag value becomes 0, and the carry flag value is inverted. Is 1. If the divisor data cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination data (that is, the subtraction determination data is not greater than or equal to the divisor data), the carry flag value is 1, and the inverted value of the carry flag is It becomes 0.

Following step S714, the calculation means 114b rotates 8 bits of the ratio display work area to the left (upper bit side) by 1 bit, and stores the inverted value of the carry flag in the 0th bit (step S715). ). For example, when the number of repetitions is 7, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated 6 times from 6 to 1 and 1 bit to the left, and when the number of repetitions becomes 0, the ratio is displayed. It will be stored in the 6th bit of the work area. Further, for example, when the number of repetitions is 6, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated 5 times from 5 to 1 and 1 bit to the left, and when the number of repetitions becomes 0, the ratio is displayed. It will be stored in the 5th bit of the work area.

Following step S715, the calculation means 114b returns the number of repetitions and the divisor RWM (step S716). Then, the calculation means 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions (step S717), and determines whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (step S718). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S718), the process proceeds to step S709.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S718), the calculation means 114b determines whether or not the value of the ratio display work area is greater than 100 (step S719). Then, when it is determined that the value of the work area for displaying the ratio is not larger than 100 (NO in step S719), the process returns to the processing procedure for calculating each ratio in FIG. 43. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the work area for displaying the ratio is larger than 100 (YES in step S719), it is assumed that the ratio is not calculated correctly because the ratio does not exceed 100, and the calculation means 114b is used for displaying the ratio. The work area is cleared, the value is set to 0 (step S720), and the process returns to the processing procedure for calculating each ratio in FIG. 43.

3.3.5.1. 100-fold processing The 100-fold processing (step S702) of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

The calculation means 114b acquires the initial value setting and the RWM address of the calculation work area (step S731). Here, as an initial value setting, the number of bytes of the divisor acquired in step S673 of FIG. 43 is set as the number of repetitions. Specifically, when the number of ratio calculations is 0, the number of bytes of the division number "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area for storing the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10 "4") is set as the number of repetitions. .. When the number of ratio calculations is 1, the number of bytes of the dividend "3" (the number of bytes of the storage area "3" for storing the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of ratio calculations is 2, the number of bytes of the dividend "3" (the number of bytes of the storage area "3" for storing the cumulative PS bonus payout number in FIG. 10) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of ratio calculations is 3, the number of bytes of the dividend "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area "4" for storing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of ratio calculations is 4, the number of bytes of the dividend "4" (the number of bytes of the storage area "4" for storing the total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) is set as the number of repetitions.

Subsequently, the calculation means 114b acquires a 1-byte value of the divisor RWM address (step S732). Here, the value of the division number RWM address is the value of the first byte of the division number when it is executed the first time, the value of the second byte of the division number when it is executed the second time, and so on. This is the value of the nth byte when it is executed the second time. However, when the number of ratio calculations is 0, the number of divisions RWM has a storage area corresponding to the information "number of advantageous section games" of the number of divisions (a storage area corresponding to the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 10) and the number of ratio calculations. In the case of 1, the storage area corresponding to the information of the number to be divided "the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the latest 6000 games" (the storage area corresponding to the number of continuous bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS of FIG. 10), and when the ratio calculation number is 2. When the number of divisions is 3, the storage area corresponding to the "number of bonuses paid out in the latest 6000 games" (the storage area corresponding to the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and the number of ratio calculations is 3, the information on the number of divisions "cumulative game". When the storage area corresponding to "the number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10" (the storage area corresponding to the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in FIG. 10) and the number of ratio calculations is 4, the information of the number to be divided "the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative game" It is a storage area corresponding to "(a storage area corresponding to the total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 10).

Subsequently, the arithmetic means 114b multiplies the 1-byte value of the acquired division RWM address by 100, and stores the high-order byte value in the H register and the low-order byte value in the L register (step S733).

Then, the calculation means 114b adds the value of the L register and the value of the D register, sets the addition result in the calculation work area, and stores the value of the H register in the D register (step S734). However, the addition result is stored in the first byte of the calculation work area when it is executed the first time, and is stored in the second byte of the calculation work area when it is executed the second time. When executed, it is stored in the nth byte of the calculation work area.

The calculation means 114b determines whether or not a calion has occurred (whether or not a carry has occurred) in the calculation result of adding the value of the L register and the value of the D register (step S735). If it is determined that the calculation result is not a calion (NO in step S735), the process proceeds to step S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is a calion (YES in step S735), the calculation means 114b adds 1 / carry-up to the value of the D register to update the value of the D register (step S736). , Step S737.

In step S737, the calculation means 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions. Then, the calculation means 114b determines whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (step S738), and if it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S738), returns to step S732. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S738), the calculation means 114b sets the value of the D register corresponding to the most significant byte of the calculation result to the value of the division number RWM address of 3 bytes. In this case, it is set in the 4th byte of the calculation work area, and when the value of the division number RWM address is 4 bytes, it is set in the 5th byte of the calculation work area (step S739). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation process of FIG. 44.

3.3.5.1. Shift processing The shift processing (steps S708, S709) of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. However, the shift process of FIG. 46 is performed on the least significant bit of the A register corresponding to the least significant bit of the 6th byte and the 5th to 1st bytes of the calculation work area.

The arithmetic means 114b initializes the most significant byte including the A register (step S751), and rotates the 1st to 5th bytes of the arithmetic work area to the left (upper bit side) by 1 bit (step S752). As a result, the least significant bit of the A register, the 5th to 2nd bytes of the arithmetic work area, and the upper 7 bits of the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area are the 5th to 1 byte of the arithmetic work area before rotation. The bits up to the eye will be memorized. Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation process of FIG. 44.

3.3.5.1. Subtraction process The subtraction process (step S711) of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

The calculation means 114b subtracts the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area in the subtraction determination portion (step S756), and then subtracts. The value corresponding to the carry flag is subtracted from the data of the least significant bit of the A register in the determination portion (step S757). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation process of FIG. 44. However, when the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area is equal to or larger than the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 0. On the other hand, when the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area is not more than the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 1.

3.3.6 Each ratio display setting The each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not there is an E4 error (step S771). When it is determined that an E4 error is made (YES in step S771), the display control means 115 sets the ratio indicator 69 at the ones digit, the tens digit, the hundreds digit, and the thousands digit, respectively. Set $ FF (hexadecimal notation) corresponding to all lighting (step S772). The set values for the ones place, the tens place, the hundreds place, and the thousands place of the ratio display 69 are the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. It is used to turn on or off the lit places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the place, the hundreds place, and the thousands place.

On the other hand, if it is not determined as an E4 error (NO in step S771), the display control means 115 performs a ratio display data acquisition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 49 (step S773).

Following step S773, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio display number is 1 corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) or 2 corresponding to the accessory ratio (6000 games) (step). S774). If it is determined that the ratio display number is 1 or 2 (YES in step S774), the process proceeds to step S775, and if it is determined that the ratio display number is neither 1 or 2 (NO in step S774), the step. Proceed to S776.

In step S775, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (whether or not the number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM has not reached 6000) (step S775). If it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is not 0 (NO in step S775), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (YES in step S775), the process proceeds to step S777.

In step S776, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games is greater than 174999. If it is determined that the total number of games is greater than 174999 (YES in step S776), the process proceeds to step S779, and if it is determined that the total number of games is 174999 or less (NO in step S776). ), Proceed to the process of step S777. The total number of games, 174999, is an example and is not limited to this.

In step S777, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio blinking flag is 0. If it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S777), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S777), the display control means 115 can light the hundreds and thousandss of the ratio indicator 69, respectively, A, B, C, and D. , E, F, G, DP, the set value of the litable part excluding the litable part DP (dot part) in the thousands place is cleared to set the value to 0 (step S778), and the process proceeds to step S779.

When the ratio display number is 1 or 2, the ratio display 69 in step S802 of FIG. 49, which will be described later, is when the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM reaches 6000. The set values for the hundreds place and the thousands place (excluding the litable part DP of the thousands place) are the hundreds place and the thousands place of the ratio indicator 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. 32, respectively. It is used to turn on or off the litable parts of A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP except for the litable parts DP in the thousands. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set value for the hundreds place and the thousands place of the ratio display 69 in step S778 (excluding the lit place DP of the thousands place) is 7 in step S447 of FIG. In the seg display processing, the ratio display 69 is lit except for the lit places DP of the hundreds and thousands of the hundreds and thousands of A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible parts, and among the hundreds and thousands of places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, the thousands of places that can be turned on DP All the parts that can be lit except are turned off.

When the ratio display number is 0, 3 or 4, the ratio is displayed in step S802 of FIG. 49, which will be described later, when the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after installation or after clearing the RWM reaches 175,000. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. 32, the set values for the hundreds place and the thousands place of the device 69 (excluding the litable part DP of the thousands place) are the hundreds place and the thousands of the ratio display 69. It is used to turn on or off the litable points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of each position except for the litable points DP of the thousandth place. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set value for the hundreds place and the thousands place of the ratio display 69 in step S778 (excluding the lit place DP of the thousands place) is 7 in step S447 of FIG. In the seg display processing, the ratio display 69 is lit except for the lit places DP of the hundreds and thousands of the hundreds and thousands of A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible parts, and among the hundreds and thousands of places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, the thousands of places that can be turned on DP All the parts that can be lit except are turned off.

In step S779, the display control means 115 acquires the data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio comparison data table. Here, in the ratio comparison data table, the ratio display number, the type of ratio, and the ratio specified value (values to be judged to be fraudulent, and if it is equal to or more than the ratio specified value, fraud is performed. Judgment) and memorize. The ratio type "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" and the ratio specified value "70" are stored in association with the ratio display number 0, and the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is associated with the ratio display number 1. ) ”And the ratio specified value“ 70 ”are stored, and the ratio type“ accessory ratio (6000 games) ”and the ratio specified value“ 70 ”are stored in association with the ratio display number 2. Further, the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" and the ratio specified value "70" are stored in association with the ratio display number 3, and the ratio type "role ratio (cumulative)" is associated with the ratio display number 4. Cumulative) ”and the ratio specified value“ 70 ”are stored. The ratio specified value of 70 is an example and is not limited to this, and does not have to be the same value between the ratios.

Following step S779, the display control means 115 compares the data (ratio defined value) corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S779 with the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number (step S780). Here, the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number is the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 10) when the ratio display number is 0. Yes, when the ratio display number is 1, it is the value of the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10), and when the ratio display number is 2, it is the value. It is a value of the character ratio (6000 games) (value of the storage area corresponding to the cumulative PS character ratio in FIG. 10), and when the ratio display number is 3, the value of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) (FIG. 10). The value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative bonus ratio), and when the ratio display number is 4, the value of the bonus ratio (cumulative) (storage area corresponding to the total cumulative bonus ratio in FIG. 10). Value).

Following step S780, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the determination result is a calion (step S781). When it is determined that the determination result is a calion (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is less than the acquired data (ratio specified value)) (YES in step S781), the process proceeds to step S784.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not a calion (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or greater than the acquired data (ratio specified value)) (NO in step S781), the display control means 115 has a ratio blinking flag of 0. (Step S782). Then, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S782), the process proceeds to step S784. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S782), the display control means 115 can light the tens and ones of the ratio indicator 69, respectively, A, B, C, and D. , E, F, G, DP, clear the set value of the litable part excluding the litable part DP (dot part) of each of the tens place and the ones place, and set the value to 0 (step S783), and step S784. Proceed to the process of.

When the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or higher than the specified value of the ratio and the ratio blinking flag is 0, the set value for the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in step S811 of FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. 32, the lit places A, B, and C of the ratio indicator 69 are lit, respectively. , D, E, F, G, DP, each of the tens and tens places can be lit. It is used to turn on or off the litable parts excluding the DP. Further, when the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set value for the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in step S783 (excluding the litable part DP of each of the ones place and the tens place) is shown in FIG. 32. In the 7-segment display processing in step S447 of the above step S447, the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, which can be lit at the ones place and the tens place, respectively, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the litable parts excluding the litable parts DP of each place, and of the litable parts A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP of each of the ones place and the tens place. All of the litable parts except the DP, which can be lit in the 1st place and the tens place, are turned off.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not the dot blinking flag is 0 (step S784). Then, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S784), the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35. On the other hand, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S784), the display control means 115 sets the litable place DP for each of the ones place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the ratio indicator 69. The value is cleared and the value is set to 0 (step S785), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for external use in FIG. 35.

When the dot blinking flag is 0, the set value for the lit position DP of the ratio indicator 69 in step S802 of FIG. 49, which will be described later, and the ones digit and tens of the ratio indicator 69 in step S811 Set value for each lit place DP of each place, set value for one place lit place DP of ratio indicator 69 in step S813, tens place lit place DP of ratio indicator 69 in step S815 The set value for the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. 32 is the set value for the lit place DP of the ratio indicator 69 in the thousands digit in step S817. , Thousands place It is used to turn on or off the litable part DP. However, the value corresponding to the extinguishing is first set in step S802 for the lit position DP of the thousands of places of the ratio indicator 69, and the value corresponding to the lighting is set in step S817 when YES in step S816 is set. To. Further, the value corresponding to the extinguishing is first set in step S811 for the tens digit litable portion DP of the ratio display 69, and the value corresponding to the lighting is set in step S815 when YES in step S814 is set. To. Further, the value corresponding to the extinguishing is first set in step S811 for the littable portion DP in the first place of the ratio indicator 69, and the value corresponding to the lighting is set in step S813 when YES in step S812 is set. To. On the other hand, when the dot blinking flag is 1, the set values for the litable points DP of the ratio indicator 69 in step S785 for each of the tens, tens, and thousandss are displayed in 7-segment display in step S447 of FIG. In the processing, it is used to turn on or off the lit place DP of each of the ones, tens, and thousands of the ratio indicator 69, and each of the ones, tens, and thousands can be lit. All of the location DP goes out.

The ratio display data acquisition (step S773) of FIG. 48 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

The display control means 115 acquires display data and display determination data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio display data table (step S801). The ratio display data table stores the ratio display number, the ratio type, the display data, and the display determination data in association with each other. Corresponding to the ratio display number "0", the ratio type "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)", display data "$ 27F7" (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, 00100111 11110111, thousands digit is the place where lighting is possible A , B, C, F are lit, and the hundreds place is lit where A, B, C, E, F, G, DP are lit), and the display determination data "1" is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)", display data "$ 7DFC" (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11111100 in binary notation, thousands digit can be lit Locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the hundreds place is lit. Locations C, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data "1" is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "2", the type of ratio "role ratio (6000 games)", display data "$ 27FC" (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, 00100111 11111100, thousands of places can be lit A, B, C, F are lit, and the hundreds place is lit where C, D, E, F, G, DP are lit), and the display determination data "1" is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "3", the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)", display data "$ 7DD8" (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11011000 in binary notation, thousands of places can be lit A, C, D, E, F, G are lit, and the hundreds place is lit where D, E, G, DP can be lit), and the display determination data "1" is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number "4", the ratio type "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)", display data "$ 27D8" (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, 00100111 11011000, thousands of places can be lit A, B, C, F are lit, and the hundreds place is lit where D, E, G, and DP can be lit), and the display determination data "1" is stored. However, of the four-digit values in hexadecimal notation of the display data, the upper two-digit value corresponds to the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69, and the lower two-digit value corresponds to the hundreds digit of the ratio indicator 69. To do. Further, the display determination data is set by the function of the slot machine, and the display determination data "1" uses the calculated value in the ratio calculation process for displaying the tens digit and the ones digit of the ratio display 69. For example, in a slot machine that does not have a function related to an advantageous section, the display determination data stored in association with the ratio display number “0” is “0”.

The display control means 115 sets the display data acquired in step S801 to the hundreds place and the thousands place of the ratio display 69 (step S802). For example, when the ratio display number is 0, $ F7 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the hundreds place of the ratio display 69, and $ 27 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the thousands place. In step S802, 0 corresponding to extinguishing is set as a setting value of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of the thousands of places of the ratio display 69.

Then, the display control means 115 sets $ 4040 (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S803). This process is a process for setting the ratio display at the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the ratio display number where the display determination data is 0 to "---" (only the litable part G is lit). is there. Then, by performing the process of step S803 before step S804, which will be described later, the process of step S803 is performed even in the slot machine in which the display determination data for all the ratio display numbers is 1. Further, in step S803, in the first embodiment, the program for displaying "---" used in the case of a model having no function related to the advantageous section has a function related to the advantageous section. This is a step to avoid so-called "unused programs" that will not be executed.

Then, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the display determination data acquired in step S801 is 0 (step S804). When it is determined that the display determination data is 0 (YES in step S804), the display control means 115 sets the display data to the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display 69. $ 40 (hexadecimal notation) is set for each of the ones and tens digits (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishing is set as a setting value of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the tens digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the display determination data is not 0 (NO in step S804), the display control means 115 acquires the value of the ratio RWM address corresponding to the ratio display number (step S805). Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 10) is acquired, and when the ratio display number is 1, it is continuous. When the value of the character ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 10) is acquired and the ratio display number is 2, the value of the character ratio (6000 games) ( When the storage area value corresponding to the cumulative PS bonus ratio in FIG. 10 is acquired and the ratio display number is 3, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) value (to the total cumulative continuous bonus ratio in FIG. 10). The value of the corresponding storage area) is acquired, and when the ratio display number is 4, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. 10) is acquired.

Following step S805, the display control means 115 sets $ 6F6F (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S806). In this process, when the value of the ratio RWM is 100, the ratio display at the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 is set to "99" (lighting possible parts other than lighting possible parts E and DP are turned on). It is a process for.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not the value of the ratio RWM address is 100 (step S807). When the value of the ratio RWM is determined to be 100 (YES in step S807), the display control means 115 sets the display data to the ones place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display. $ 6F (hexadecimal notation) is set for each of the ones and tens of digits of 69 (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishing is set as a setting value of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the tens digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

When it is determined that the RWM value of the ratio display 69 is not 100 (NO in step S807), the display control means 115 divides the value of the ratio RWM address by 10 (decimal notation) to calculate the quotient and the remainder. (Step S808). The value in the decimal notation of the quotient is the tens digit value in the decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address, and the value in the remainder decimal notation is one in the decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address. The value of the place.

Then, the display control means 115 performs a display data acquisition process described in detail later using FIG. 50 for acquiring the tens digit display data (step S809), and subsequently acquires the ones digit display data. The display data acquisition process, which will be described in detail later, is performed with reference to FIG. 50 (step S810). Then, the display control means 115 sets the tens digit display data acquired in step S810 and the tens digit display data acquired in step S809 to the tens digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69 (). Step S811), the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to extinguishing is set as a setting value of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the tens digit and the tens digit of the ratio indicator 69.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not at least one of the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value (step S812). The ratio of the ratio display number 3 is the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous bonus ratio in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is the accessory ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio of FIG. Further, the ratio specified values for each of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are stored in the above-mentioned ratio comparison data table.

If it is determined that any of the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S812), the process proceeds to step S814. It should be noted that the set value of the lit possible location DP in the first place of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, remains 0 corresponding to the extinguishing. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value (YES in step S812), the display control means 115 is the place where the ratio indicator 69 can be lit. 1 corresponding to lighting is set for DP (step S813), and the process proceeds to step S814.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value (step S814). The ratio of the ratio display number 0 is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio of FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 1 is the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio of the cumulative PS of FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 2 is the accessory ratio (6000 games), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS of FIG. The ratio of the ratio display number 3 is the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous bonus ratio of FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is the accessory ratio (cumulative), which is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio of FIG. In addition, the ratio regulation values for each of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative) are compared with the above-mentioned ratios. It is stored in the data table.

If it is determined that any of the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S814), the process proceeds to step S816. It should be noted that the set value of the tens digit litable location DP of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, remains 0 corresponding to the extinguishing. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one of the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or higher than the specified ratio value (YES in step S814), the display control means 115 is the tens digit of the ratio display 69. 1 corresponding to lighting is set for DP (step S815), and the process proceeds to step S816.

The display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games (value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total total number of games in FIG. 10) is less than 175,000 (step S816). When it is determined that the total number of games is 175,000 or more (NO in step S816), the process returns to the processing procedure for each ratio display setting in FIG. 48. It should be noted that the set value of the lit position DP of the thousands of places of the ratio indicator 69 remains the value set in step S802, that is, remains 0 corresponding to the extinguishing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games is less than 175,000 (YES in step S816), the display control means 115 sets 1 corresponding to the lighting of the ratio indicator 69 with respect to the lit position DP in the thousands. The setting (step S817) is performed, and the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG. 48.

The display data acquisition process (steps S809, S810) of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

The display control means 115 acquires the bit values of the lower 4 bits of the calculated data in step S808 of FIG. 49 (step S831). Here, in the display data acquisition process related to the acquisition of the tens place display data, the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the quotient value is acquired, and in the display data acquisition process related to the acquisition of the ones place display data. , The bit value of the lower 4 bits of the remainder value is acquired. Since the value of the ratio RWM address is 0 or more and less than 100, the quotient value and the remainder value are 0 or more and 9 or less in decimal notation, and can be represented by 4 bits in binary notation. Therefore, the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculated data is acquired.

Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets the 8-bit bit value corresponding to the lower 4-bit value acquired in step S831 in the display data (step S832), and sets the processing procedure of the ratio display data acquisition process in FIG. 49. Return.

However, when the lower 4 bits are 0000 (binary notation), the display data is $ 3F in hexadecimal notation (00111111 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F are lit). Is set and the lower 4 bits are 0001 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 06 in hexadecimal notation (00000011 in binary notation, litable locations B and C are lit), and the lower 4 When the bit is 0010 (binary notation), $ 5B in hexadecimal notation (01010111 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, D, E, G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0011 (binary notation), $ 4F in hexadecimal notation (01001111 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, C, D, G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0100 (binary notation), $ 66 in hexadecimal notation (01100110 in binary notation, lit locations B, C, F, G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 0101 (binary notation), $ 6D in hexadecimal notation (01101101 in binary notation, lit locations A, C, D, F, G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 0110 (binary notation), $ 7D in hexadecimal notation (01111101 in binary notation, lit locations A, C, D, E, F, G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 When the bit is 0111 (binary notation), $ 27 in hexadecimal notation (in binary notation, 00100111, lit places A, B, C, F are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. In the case of 1000 (binary notation), $ 7F in hexadecimal notation (01111111 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G are lit) is set in the display data. When the lower 4 bits are 1001 (binary notation), $ 6F in hexadecimal notation (01101111 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, C, D, F, G are lit) is set in the display data. Will be done.

4. Sub-error notification processing The error notification processing in the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

It is determined whether or not the sub-control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71 has received the transmission command in step S439 of FIG. 32 from the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 (step S851). If it is determined that the transmission command has not been received (NO in step S851), the process ends.

When it is determined that the transmission command has been received (YES in step S851), it is determined whether or not the transmission command is in the door state (step S852). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transmission command is in the door state related to the opening and closing of the door (front door 5).

When it is determined that the transmission command is in the door state (YES in step S852), it is determined whether or not the door state is the open state of the front door 5 (step S853). When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S853), an error notification is performed (step S854). Specifically, the sound is output from the speaker, the image of the liquid crystal display 27 is output, and the effect lamp lights up and blinks. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 5 is not in the open state, that is, in the closed state (NO in step S853), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S855). Specifically, the sound output from the speaker is stopped, the image output of the liquid crystal display 27 is stopped, and the lighting and blinking of the effect lamp are stopped. Then, the process ends.

When it is determined in the determination in step S852 that the transmission command is not in the door state (NO in step S852), an error notification is performed (step S856). Specifically, a voice notification of "error" is performed from the speaker, and an error code such as "E2" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

Following step S856, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the error state in step S132 of FIG. 22 has been received (step S857). If it is determined that the information indicating the error state has not been received (NO in step S857), the standby state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information of the error state is being received (YES in step S857), the error re-notification is performed (step S858).

Following step S858, it is determined whether or not an error release event (signal) has been received (step S859). When it is determined that the error release event (signal) has been received (YES in step S859), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S860). That is, it returns to the state in which the error notification is not performed. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error release event (signal) has not been received (NO in step S859), the process ends.

Subsequently, the relationship between the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in a game progressable state and the error shown in FIG. 16 has not occurred. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays the number of medals to be paid out according to the progress of the game.

Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 normally controls the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Display control is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) for 5 seconds as described in the control content of the combination ratio monitor in FIG. 60, followed by , Display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) Is displayed. At this time, the normal display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. However, in the normal display mode, of the plurality of litable parts of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69, some of the litable parts (in the present embodiment, each of the thousands, tens, and ones is lit). Display of game inspection information (including ratio values such as advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and identification information for identifying the displayed ratio) using other lighting possible locations excluding the possible location DP) This is performed, and a display related to notification of an abnormal state of five types of game inspection information is performed using some of the above-mentioned littable parts. In the example of FIG. 60, it is assumed that all of the five types of ratios are less than the ratio specified value and the total number of games is 175,000 or more before the power is turned off. The DP (dot part) that can be lit in each of the 1st place and the 1st place is turned off.

Then, when the power is turned off while the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is being displayed, the main CPU 61 is turned off, and the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 and the payout indicator 46 are turned off. To do.

After that, when the power is turned on and the specific event detecting means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an RWM error (corresponding to a predetermined specific event among the specific events), the main CPU 61 enters the E4 error state, and the game stopping means 113 plays a game. Stop the game so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 to display the error code E4. At this time, the contents specifically displayed on the payout display 46 are shown on the 7-segment display.

Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 performs special display control for controlling the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the special display mode described with reference to FIG. 15 when an RWM error is detected. At this time, a special display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is shown on the 7-segment display of the ratio monitor. However, in the special display mode, in the present embodiment, all the litable parts of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 are used. In this way, by performing special display control in which the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 becomes a special display mode when an RWM error occurs, the front door 5 is opened and the inside of the housing 3 is checked. It is possible to know that an RWM error has occurred without checking the error code displayed on the payout display 46 on the front side of the door 5. That is, it is possible to know the occurrence of the RWM error while opening the front door 5 and checking the inside of the housing, and it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of having to look at the payout indicator 46.

Then, when the power is turned off, the main CPU 61 is turned off, and the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 and the payout indicator 46 are turned off.

A setting change state transition operation is performed to cancel the RWM error, the main CPU 61 shifts to the setting change state, the RWM error is canceled at this timing, and the game stop by the game stop means 113 is canceled. Then, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays the number of medals to be paid out according to the progress of the game. The display of the payout display 46 in the setting change state can be variously determined, and all 7 segments of the payout display 46 may be turned on so that the setting change state can be known.

Further, when the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 shifts to the setting change state, the ratio display is in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 without performing the above special display control. (Ratio monitor) Normal display control for controlling 69 is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 starts from the display of the display items (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) as described in the control contents of the combination ratio monitor in FIG. 60, and the display items are displayed. (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, then display item (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and display item (3) bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed. It is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. However, since the RWM is cleared, the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 are blinking, and the lower two digits of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 (the lower two digits (role ratio monitor) 69). 00 will be displayed in the tens place and the ones place). Further, since the total number of games is set to 0 by clearing the RWM, the litable portion DP (dot portion) of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 in the thousands place will blink.

Then, when the setting is confirmed in the setting changeable state, the main CPU 61 is in the game progressable state.

The transition of the above setting change state and the confirmation of the setting will be described. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts the setting change key into the key cylinder in a state where the power switch 50a is OFF, rotates the key, and turns on the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, turn on the power switch. At this time, the main CPU 61 detects the operation of turning on the setting change key switch 50b, and shifts to the setting change state. This setting change state is a set value of a plurality of stages (1 to 6 in the present embodiment) provided by the setting control means 101 stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the player based on the operation of the setting change button 50c. ) Is set, and the set value can be changed.

Then, the setting control means 101 cyclically switches the setting value of the winning probability between the setting 1 and the setting 6 for each operation of the setting change button 50c by the administrator. The administrator operates the start switch 19 when the set value of the winning probability becomes a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, and when the setting control means 101 detects an operation on the start switch 19, the set value is set. To confirm. Then, the administrator rotates the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder to turn off the setting change key switch 50b, and when the setting control means 101 detects that the setting change key switch 50b is OFF, the setting change process is performed. finish.

In the present embodiment, the timing of returning to the normal display control of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 after the RWM error is detected is the timing of shifting to the setting change state after the occurrence of the RWM error. It is not limited, and may be the timing of re-input of the setting after the transition of the setting change state, the timing of detecting the setting confirmation operation after the transition of the setting change state, the timing of canceling the RWM error, the timing of ending the setting change state, and the like.

Subsequently, the display of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout indicator 46, and other relationships with the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG. The same applies to FIG. 60 until the power is first turned off and then the power is turned on. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted here.

When the power is turned on and the specific event detecting means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an error other than the RWM error shown in FIG. 16 (a specific event different from a predetermined specific event among the specific events. Here, an E0 error), the main The CPU 61 is in the E0 error state, and the game stopping means 113 stops the game so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 to display the error code E0. At this time, the contents specifically displayed on the payout display 46 are shown on the 7-segment display.

Further, in the case of an error other than the RWM error (here, the E0 error), the data for displaying the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the like is not corrupted, so that the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 is shown in FIG. , The normal display control for controlling the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 starts from the display of the display items (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) as described in the control contents of the combination ratio monitor in FIG. 61, and the display items are displayed. (1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, then display item (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and display item (3) bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed. Displayed for 5 seconds, display item (4) continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (5) bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) ) Is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 61, it is assumed that all of the five types of ratios are less than the specified ratio value, the total number of games is 175,000 or more, and the ratio display 69 is lit in the thousands, tens, and ones. Possible points DP (dot part) are off.

After that, when the error is cleared, the main CPU 61 is in a state where the game can proceed. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 according to the progress of the game, the display of the error code E0 disappears, and the display according to the progress of the game such as the display of the number of medals paid out is displayed. Will be done. It is not necessary to change the setting for the method of canceling the error other than the RWM error (here, the E0 error), and the error can be canceled by operating the reset switch or the setting change button in this embodiment.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 62, the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and still other relationships with the state of the main CPU 61 will be described.

It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in a game progressable state and the error shown in FIG. 16 has not occurred. At this time, the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 controls the payout display 46 according to the progress of the game, and displays the number of medals to be paid out according to the progress of the game.

Further, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 normally controls the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Display control is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (2) continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) for 5 seconds as described in the control content of the combination monitor in FIG. 62. Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (5) Character ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds. It is displayed, and the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed. At this time, the normal display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 62, the bonus ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display number 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display numbers 0 to 3, the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the bonus. It is assumed that the ratio (6000 games) and the continuous character ratio (cumulative) are less than the specified ratio values, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more. Each litable part DP (dot part) is blinking, and the litable part DP (dot part) in the thousands is off.

Then, the power is turned off while the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the same processing as before the power is turned off is performed in the slot machine 1. Here, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 controls the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode described with reference to FIGS. 12, 13 and 14 when displaying the game inspection information. Normal display control is performed. As a result, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 displays the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) for 5 seconds, as described in the control content of the combination ratio monitor in FIG. , Display item (2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (3) Character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, Display item (4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) Is displayed for 5 seconds, the display item (5) accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, the normal display mode specifically displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. In the example of FIG. 62, the bonus ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display number 4 is equal to or higher than the ratio specified value, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display numbers 0 to 3, the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the bonus. It is assumed that the ratio (6000 games) and the continuous character ratio (cumulative) are less than the specified ratio values, and the total number of games is 175,000 or more. Each litable part DP (dot part) is blinking, and the litable part DP (dot part) of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 in the thousands is turned off.

Subsequently, a modified example of the display content of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 62 corresponds to the special display mode, and the display control corresponds to the special display control.

Modifications 1 to 3 are related to the display of the ratio indicator (role ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs, and the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 63 is the ratio when an RWM error occurs. This is a specific display example of the display 69.

In the first modification, of the lighting possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP in each of the thousands, hundreds, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69. Only the locations G and DP that can be lit are lit (“-” display + dot lit).

In the second modification, of the lighting possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP in each of the thousands, hundreds, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69. Only the locations A, D, E, F, G, and DP that can be lit are lit (“E” display + dot lit).

In the third modification, of the lighting possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP in each of the thousands, hundreds, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69. Only the part DP that can be lit is lit (no display + dot lit).

Comparing the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 63 with the display contents of the 7-segment display columns of FIGS. 12, 13, and 14, when the RWM error of the modified examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 63 occurs. In the special display control of, the game inspection information (including the value of the ratio such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the identification information for identifying the displayed ratio) is not displayed, and the predetermined location is displayed. It is designed to light up. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an RWM error has occurred in the modified examples 1 to 3 by displaying the ratio indicator 69 in which the game inspection information is not displayed and the predetermined portion is lit. Become.

If the normal lighting mode displayed by the normal display control and the special lighting mode displayed by the special display control can be distinguished, the normal lighting mode and the special lighting mode are described above. It is not limited to what you have done.

Subsequently, the arrangement relationship of the parts (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) mounted on the main control board 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 64.

Three connectors CN1, CN2, and CN3 are mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 in a region near one edge thereof, and an edge on the connector CN3 side in a region near the opposite edge to the one edge. One connector CN4 is mounted nearby. Of the connectors CN1, CN2, CN3, and CN4, at least the connector CN1 is formed on the substrate case CS as shown in FIG. 64 (a) showing a schematic view of the AA arrow cross section of the main control board 63 of FIG. It is exposed to the outside from the connector opening CS1.

Further, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, the main CPU 61 is mounted near the edge on the connector CN1 side in the area near the opposite edge. A test mounting area for mounting a test IC or the like is provided between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN4.

Further, on one side 63A of the main control board 63, a ratio indicator 69 and ICs 81 and 82 are mounted between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN1. The ratio indicator 69 is arranged at a position closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61. Further, the ICs 81 and 82 are arranged between the ratio display 69 and the main CPU 61, and as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the ratio display (in FIG. 64, it is simply described as "display (display component)". )) The height from one side 63A of the main control board 63 is lower than that of 69 (see the dotted line in FIG. 64 (a)). However, no component such as an IC having a height lower than that of the ratio indicator 69 is arranged between the ratio indicator 69 and the connector CN1. The ratio indicator 69 is preferably arranged between the connector closest to the main CPU 61 and the main CPU 61. Further, the ratio indicator 69 is arranged between the connector corresponding to the connector opening having the longest opening side and the main CPU 61 because the longer the opening side is, the easier it is to insert an illegal member such as a wire. Is preferable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64A, the ratio indicator 69 is a main control board 63 on which one surface (component mounting surface) 63A of the main control board 63 is opposite to the other surface (parts and the like are not mounted). (Back side) Soldering 69A is performed only on the 63B side, and the connector CN1, main CPU (simply referred to as "CPU" in FIG. 64) 61, IC81, 82, etc. other than the ratio indicator 69 are 63A on one side of the main control board 63. Soldering CN1A, 61A, 81A, 82A is performed on both the side and the other side 63B side. The parts other than the ratio indicator 69 are not soldered on both sides of the one side 63A and the other side 63B, but only one side is soldered, for example, the connector CN1 is only on the other side 63B side. May be good.

Further, IC 83, 84, 85, a diode 91, a resistor group 92, 94, a transistor 93, and a capacitor group 95 are mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63.

The IC 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, diode 91, resistor group 92, 94, transistor 93, and capacitor group 95 are, for example, inputting a signal to the main CPU 61 or outputting a signal from the main CPU 61 to an external device. It is a part related to.

As shown in FIG. 5, the connector CN1, the ratio indicator 69, the IC81, 82, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, and the ratio indicator 69 is arranged closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61. The effect of this will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (b), (c), and (d).

FIG. 64B is an example different from the embodiment, in which the connectors CN1, IC81, and main CPU 61 are arranged in this order. In this case, in order for the illegal member 180 such as the wire inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the IC81, but the parts having a lower height than the parts having a higher height are Since it is easy to get over the fraudulent member 180, it is not difficult to make the fraudulent member 180 reach the main CPU 61 even if there is an IC 81 having a low height between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61.

FIG. 64 (c) is an example different from the embodiment, in which the connector CN1, IC81, the ratio indicator 69, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side. In this case, in order for the illegal member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the IC81 and the ratio indicator 69, but the component is taller than the component having a low height. Although it is difficult to get over the fraudulent member 180, by using the low-height IC81 arranged between the connector CN1 and the ratio indicator 69, the fraudulent member 180 has a high-height ratio indicator 69. It is not difficult to bring the fraudulent member 180 to the main CPU 61 even if the IC 81 and the ratio indicator 69 are located between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61.

FIG. 64D shows an embodiment in which the connector CN1, the ratio indicator 69, the IC81, 82, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, and the ratio indicator 69 is arranged from the main CPU 61 to the connector CN1. It is arranged at a position close to (for example, a distance within twice the height of the ratio indicator 69). In this case, in order for the fraudulent member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the ratio indicator 69 and the IC 81, and the ratio display having a higher height than the parts having a lower height. It is difficult for the fraudulent member 180 to get over the device 69, and the fraudulent member 180 has a high height because a low-height component is not mounted between the connector CN1 and the high-height ratio indicator 69. It is not possible to use low-height parts to get over the ratio indicator 69. Further, by arranging the ratio indicator 69 closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61, the space available for the fraudulent member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to get over the ratio indicator 69 is also narrowed, so that the fraudulent member It is difficult for 180 to get over the ratio indicator 69, and it is difficult for the fraudulent member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

From the viewpoint of preventing the unauthorized member 180 from using an IC having a height lower than that of the ratio indicator 69 in order to overcome the ratio indicator 69, the ratio indicator 69 is connected to the main CPU 61 from the connector CN1. Even if it is placed close to each other and parts such as an IC having a height lower than that of the ratio display 69 are not placed between the connector CN1 and the ratio display 69, but are placed between the ratio display 69 and the main CPU 61. , It becomes difficult to bring the fraudulent member 180 to the main CPU 61.

According to the arrangement of the connector CN1, the main CPU 61, the ratio indicator 69, and the IC 81, 82 described with reference to FIG. 5, the ratio indicator is placed on the board case CS sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. By accommodating the 69, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the ratio indicator 69, and even if the fraudulent member 180 is inserted from the connector opening CS1 to cheat on the main CPU 61, the ratio indicator 69 As a barrier, it becomes difficult for the fraudulent member 180 to reach the main CPU 61, and fraudulent acts against the main CPU 61 can be suppressed. Further, by mounting the ratio display 69 near the connector CN1, it is possible to collectively check the display contents of the ratio display 69 and the vicinity of the connector which is likely to be a target of fraud.

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (a), by soldering the ratio indicator 69 only on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63, the surface of the ratio indicator 69 facing the main control board 63 is opposed to the main control board 63. Even when it is specified that (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 on the side opposite to the display surface on which the 7-segment display of the ratio indicator 69 is arranged) is separated from the soldered portion by a predetermined amount, one of the main control boards 63. It is possible to narrow the space between the direction 63A and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, and pass the fraudulent member 180 through the gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 to pass the main CPU 61. It becomes difficult to cheat against.

Although the ratio display 69 is configured to be composed of four separate 7-segment displays, it may be configured to include at least one display unit composed of a plurality of 7-segment displays. Good. For example, it may be configured by one display unit configured by unitizing four 7-segment displays, or may be configured by two display units configured by unitizing two 7-segment displays. In this case, since there is no gap between the 7-segment displays in the ratio display 69 or the number of the gaps is reduced, it becomes difficult to cheat the main CPU 61 by passing the fraudulent member 180 through the gap between the 7-segment displays. ..

Further, the ratio display 69 has a rectangular shape, and the terminals of the ratio display 69 are located on the side 69B1 facing the connector CN1 of the ratio display 69 and on the side 69B2 facing the side 69B1 of the ratio display 69. The ratio indicator 69 may be mounted on one side 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be arranged. In this case, the unauthorized member 180 is passed through a gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface (lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 to the main control board 63 with respect to the main CPU 61. Even if an attempt is made to perform fraudulent activity, the terminal of the ratio indicator 69 becomes a barrier and it becomes difficult to pass the fraudulent member 180 through the gap. Therefore, fraudulent activity against the main CPU 61 by passing the fraudulent member 180 through the gap is suppressed. can do.

Further, the main control board 63 is provided with a test mounting area for mounting electronic components during the test in order to output a test signal, and the ratio indicator 69 can be mounted in a region close to the test mounting area. You may. The mounting area during the test is an area where electronic components are mounted for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the test device, and even if the electronic components mounted in the mounting area during the test are cheated, the gaming machine will be fraudulent. Is not directly connected. Therefore, when a fraudulent person commits a fraudulent act, it is necessary to bring the fraudulent member such as a wire to another electronic component beyond the mounting area at the time of the test, and the part of the fraudulent member that can be visually recognized from the outside becomes large and is externally visible. Since it becomes easy to visually recognize the fraudulent member of the game machine, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts against the gaming machine.

Further, the arrangement of parts (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) mounted on the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

By the way, the signals transmitted on the main control board 63 include, for example, set values (settings 1 to 6), game states (normal game state, special game state, etc.), winning or winning, medals, which are easy to obtain medals. Signals that are directly related to either the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium, such as payouts, and signals that are not directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium are included. The area surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 65 includes a first terminal as a terminal that handles a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium, and the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium. A second terminal that handles signals that are not directly related to any of the above may or may not be included. Further, the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line does not include the first terminal that handles a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium as a terminal, and the advantage of the game and the game medium. It includes a second terminal that handles signals that are not directly related to any of the acquisitions.

Here, the first terminal and the fourth wiring that handle signals directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium are, for example, the terminals and wiring related to the input of the signal to the main CPU 61, from the main CPU 61. Terminals and wiring related to the output of the payout signal of the game medium (terminals and wiring related to the output of the signal from the main CPU 61 (payout control means 110) to the hopper unit 43 (hopper motor 57)). Further, the second terminal and the third wiring that handle signals that are not directly related to the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium are, for example, left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M from the main CPU 61 (stop control means 106). , Terminals and wiring related to signal output to parts related to driving 13R (left / middle / right reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R), parts related to credit display from main CPU 61 (credit display control means 116) (credit display control means 116) Terminals and wiring related to signal output to the credit display 45), or terminals and wiring related to signal output from the main CPU 61 (cancellation control means 117) to parts (medal selector 48) related to cancellation of the game medium. Is. In addition to the terminals of the parts, the terminals referred to here include vias, through holes, and the like that can be easily conducted by a fraudster with a wire or the like. Further, even if the parts are of the same type, the terminals and wirings of the parts may be the first terminal and the fourth wiring, or may be the second terminal and the third wiring, depending on the signal to be handled. For example, the IC 81 described later surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is an IC related to the second terminal and the third wiring, and the IC 82 described later surrounded by the dotted line is an IC related to the first terminal and the fourth wiring. The wiring that handles signals that are directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium and the wiring that handles the signals that are not directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium include the board wiring. Make it not exist.

As shown in FIG. 65, a ratio indicator 69 is mounted on one side 63A of the main control board 63. The ratio display 69 is composed of a package such as DIP in which the terminal of the ratio display 69 is not provided in the central region of the opposite surface (lower surface of the ratio display 69) facing the arrangement surface of the 7-segment display. ing. When such a ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the one side 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) There is a risk that a gap will be created between the two, and the IC will be illegally hidden and mounted in this gap.

Further, on one side 63A of the main control board 63, connectors CN1, CN2, IC81, 83, 84, 85, a diode 91, resistance groups 92, 94, and a transistor 93 are mounted around the ratio indicator 69. ing. A second terminal is arranged on the connectors CN1, CN2, IC81, 83, 84, 85, a diode 91, a resistor group 92, 94, and a transistor 93, or a second terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. The first terminal is not arranged, or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, between the first terminal of the connector CN2 and the ratio indicator 69 in the region surrounded by the dotted line, the second portion of the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line on the ratio indicator 69 side of the connector CN2. The two terminals are arranged, the second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side, and the connector CN2 on which the first terminal is not arranged is arranged on the ratio display 69 side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the IC 82 and the main CPU 61 are mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so that the IC 81 is located adjacent to the IC 81 and between the own component and the ratio indicator 69. Has been done. The IC 82 and the main CPU 61 have a first terminal arranged on the ratio display 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, a second terminal is arranged between each of the first terminal of the IC 82 and the first terminal of the main CPU 61 and the ratio indicator 69, and the first terminal is arranged. No IC81 will be placed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, one surface 63A of the main control board 63 is adjacent to the resistance groups 92 and 94, and the resistance groups 92 and 94 and the transistor 93 are located between the own component and the ratio indicator 69. The capacitor group 95 is mounted so as to be located. The first terminal is arranged in the capacitor group 95. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, the resistance groups 92, 94, in which the second terminal is arranged between the first terminal of the capacitor group 95 and the ratio indicator 69 and the first terminal is not arranged, The transistor 93 is arranged.

Further, on one side 63A of the main control board 63, as shown in FIG. 65, the connector CN2, the transistor 93, and the resistance group 94 are located adjacent to the connector CN2 and between the own component and the ratio indicator 69. As described above, the connector CN3 is mounted. A first terminal is arranged on the connector CN3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, the resistance groups 92 and 94 and the transistor 93 in which the second terminal is arranged and the first terminal is not arranged are arranged between the first terminal of the connector CN3 and the ratio indicator 69. The second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side, and the connector CN2 on which the first terminal is not arranged is arranged on the ratio display 69 side.

According to the arrangement of FIG. 65 described above, there is a component in which the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. It is installed. Therefore, one side 63A of the main control board 63 and the ratio display 69, which correspond to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 on the side opposite to the display surface on which the 7-segment display of the ratio display 69 is arranged. Even if the IC is illegally hidden and mounted in the gap between the one side 63A and the opposite surface (lower surface of the ratio display 69), the wiring extending from the illegally hidden and mounted IC is connected to the first terminal. Avoid parts mounted between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 (parts where the first terminal is not arranged or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side). It is necessary to lay wiring that extends from the IC that is illegally hidden and mounted. For example, in order to connect the wiring 185 extending from the IC mounted illegally hidden to the first terminal 82b of the IC 82, the wiring 185 avoids the IC 81 mounted between the first terminal 82b and the ratio indicator 69. It is necessary to lay it. For this reason, the wiring extending from the illegally hidden and mounted IC becomes long, and it becomes easy to find the illegally hidden IC.

In order to connect the IC illegally hidden in the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the first terminal in the area surrounded by the dotted line of the connector CN3, the first terminal is not on the ratio indicator 69 side. Is arranged, and it is necessary to avoid the connector CN2 in which the second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side. In this way, the parts arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 are illegally hidden even if the first terminal is arranged, unless the first terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. It can be treated as an effective component for discovering the IC.

Further, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 69 is surrounded by a component in which the first terminal is not arranged or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Alternatively, for all the first terminals, a component in which the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side is arranged. Is preferable. By the way, in the first terminal having a large distance from the ratio indicator 69, the linear distance between this first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 is long, and this first terminal Even if the wiring for connecting the and the illegally hidden IC is laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes long and it is easy to find the illegally hidden IC. On the other hand, in the first terminal where the distance from the ratio display 69 is small, the linear distance between the first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 becomes short. If the wiring connecting the first terminal and the illegally hidden IC can be laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes short and it is difficult to find the illegally hidden IC. Therefore, of the plurality of first terminals, at least the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal closest to the ratio indicator 69 and the ratio indicator 69, or on the ratio indicator 69 side. It suffices if a component in which the first terminal is not arranged is mounted.

Next, the laying of the wiring on one side 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

As shown in FIG. 66A, a first wiring 161 for VDD and a second wiring 162 for GND are laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the corresponding region 63C facing the ratio indicator (simply referred to as “display (display component)” in FIG. 66) 69 on one surface of the main control board 63. Here, the first wiring 161 is a wiring for supplying VDD to the ratio indicator 69. In FIG. 66A, the first wiring 161 is laid in the facing region 63C, but both the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 may not be laid in the facing region 63C. The first wiring 161 may not be laid on the 63C, but the second wiring 162 may be laid. Further, the first wiring may be for GND and the second wiring may be for VDD.

FIG. 66B is an example different from the embodiment, and is a main control board in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND are directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. It is laid on one side 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be laid also in the facing region 63C of 63. In this case, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the one surface 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the malicious IC 191 that requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in the gap so as to be hidden, it is connected to the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 in order to supply VDD and GND to the illegal IC 191. Since the wiring 192A and the wiring 192B are completed in the facing region 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to the area directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the traces of fraud cannot be visually recognized from the outside.

FIG. 66C shows an embodiment in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND are laid on one side 63A of the main control board 63, but the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the facing region 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to directly below the above. In this case, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface of the ratio indicator 69 to the one surface 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the fraudulent IC 191 that requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in the gap so as to be hidden, the wiring 192A for connecting the fraudulent IC 191 and the first wiring 161 corresponds to directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Although it is not visible from the outside because it is completed in the opposite region 63C of the main control board 63, the wiring 192B for connecting the unauthorized IC 191 and the second wiring 162 corresponds to the area directly under the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Since it cannot be completed within the facing region 63C of the main control board 63, a part of the wiring 192B is laid in an region that can be easily seen from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the illegal IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the illegal IC 191 is second. Since a part of the wiring 192B for connecting to the wiring 162 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio display 69, the unauthorized IC 191 can be easily found.

The second wiring 162 may not be laid in the peripheral region of the facing region 63C of the main control board 63, which corresponds to the periphery directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. According to this, the portion of the wiring 192B for connecting the unauthorized IC 191 to the second wiring 162 that can be visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69 becomes longer, so that it is directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Discovery of an unauthorized IC 191 mounted so as to be hidden in a gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap and the opposite surface (lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 to the one surface 63A. Will be easier.

Subsequently, a modified example related to the laying of the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In this modification, a module (“display unit including display parts”) configured by mounting a ratio indicator 69 corresponding to a display component and a driver for driving the ratio display 69 on a board 70. Correspondingly) is mounted on one side 63A of the main control board 63. The board 70 is attached to a connector 79 mounted on one side 63A of the main control board 63. Here, since the connector 79 is located directly under the substrate 70, there is no gap sufficient to illegally hide the IC or the like. Therefore, even in the case of FIG. 67, the place where the IC or the like is illegally hidden is the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Even when the terminals of the board 70 are fixed to the main control board 63 by double-sided soldering, there is a gap such that the IC or the like can be illegally hidden because the terminals of the board 70 are directly under the board 70. do not. Therefore, the place where the IC or the like is illegally hidden is a gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69.

As shown in FIG. 67, the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 are laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 drive the above-mentioned driver. Therefore, it is also laid in the region 63D facing the substrate 70 out of the one surface 63A of the main control board 63. By the way, the second wiring 162 is not laid in the area 70C (corresponding to directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the surface 70A of the substrate 70 facing the ratio indicator 69. With this configuration, as in the case of FIG. 66, the facing surface 70A of the substrate 70 corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the facing surface of the substrate 70 of the ratio indicator 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). ) And the IC illegally hidden in the gap can be easily found. The second wiring 162 is not laid also around the facing region 70C of the substrate 70, which corresponds to the periphery directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69.

Further, a modified example of laying the wiring on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the one side 63A on which the ratio indicator (simply referred to as “display (display component)” in FIG. 68) 69 and the like of the main control board 63 is mounted is the number 1 for VDD. 1 wiring 161, 2nd wiring 162 for GND, 3rd wiring 163 that handles signals that are not directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium, directly to any of the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium. A fourth wire 164 for handling related signals is laid. Then, in the region 63C facing the ratio indicator 69 on one side 63A of the main control board 63, which corresponds to directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 are located. Although it is laid, the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring 164 are not laid in the facing region 63C. Further, in the facing region 63C, it is preferable to lay the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 or both in almost the entire region according to the design rule that the distance between the wirings is the minimum.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, a second wiring 162 for GND is laid on one surface (component mounting surface) 63A and the other surface (surface on which components are not mounted) 63B of the main control board 63. It may have been done.

According to the wiring arrangement described with reference to FIG. 68 (a), as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the ratio to one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the rogue IC191 that requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted so as to hide in the gap between the display 69 and the facing surface (lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) with the one side 63A, the rogue IC191 is first mounted. The wiring 192A for connecting to the wiring 161 is laid in an area that cannot be seen from the outside, and attempts to connect to the second wiring 162 laid on the other surface 63B of the main control board 63, which is the shortest distance from the unauthorized IC 191. However, when a hole is made in the main control board 63 and an attempt is made to connect to the second wiring 162 laid on the other surface 63B of the main control board 63, the main control board 63 is laid in the opposite region 63C corresponding directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The wiring (first wiring, third wiring) is cut (193 in the figure), or the second wiring 162 and the wiring (first wiring, third wiring) laid in the opposite region 63C are short-circuited. Therefore, the slot machine does not operate normally. This makes it possible to know that fraud is being carried out.

Further, in the gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the opposite surface (lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 to the one surface 63A, which corresponds to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the rogue IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden, the wiring 192C for connecting the rogue IC 191 to the fourth wiring 164 is completed in the facing region 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to the area directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, a part of the wiring 192C is laid in an area that can be easily seen from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the illegal IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the illegal IC 191 is the fourth. Since a part of the illegal wiring for connecting to the wiring 164 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio display 69, the illegal IC 191 can be easily found, and the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium can be obtained. It becomes possible to prevent fraud.

In FIGS. 64 and 66, the ratio indicator 69 may be replaced with a module (corresponding to a “display unit”) configured by mounting a display component and a driver for driving the display component on the substrate 70. ..

Further, in FIG. 68, the ratio indicator 69 may be replaced with a module (corresponding to a “display unit”) configured by mounting a display component and a driver for driving the display component on the substrate 70. In this case, the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 or both are laid directly below the lower surface of the display component on the surface facing the display component of the substrate 70, but the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring Wiring 164 is not laid. Further, directly below the lower surface of the display component on the surface facing the display component of the substrate 70, the first wiring 161 or the third wiring 163 or the third wiring 163 or the same is used according to the design rule that the distance between the wirings is the minimum in almost the entire area thereof. It is preferable to lay both.

The mounting of the display on the main control board includes the case where the display component is mounted directly on the main control board and the case where the display unit including the display component is mounted on the main control board. For example, in order to mount the ratio indicator 69 on the main control board 63, when the ratio indicator 69 is mounted directly on the main control board 63, the main control is performed on the display unit in which the driver and the ratio indicator 69 are mounted on the board 70. The case of mounting on the substrate 63 is included.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the parts (connector, ratio indicator, main CPU, IC, etc.) and wiring mounted on the main control board 63 described with reference to FIGS. 5, 64 to 68 is the ball game machine. It can also be applied to (pachinko game machines). Here, as those directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium, for example, a game state (normal probability jackpot state, high probability jackpot (probability fluctuation) state, etc.), jackpot, game ball As a signal related to a signal that is not directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium, for example, the drive of the reel in the case of the drum type is assumed.

Further, in the slot machine 1 provided with the display window 11 capable of visually recognizing the reel on the front surface, a visibility prevention means for preventing the ratio indicator 69 from being seen when looking into the housing 3 from the display window 11 is provided. You may. As a visual prevention means, for example, the ratio indicator 69 is attached to the upper part of the support frame 13 (see FIG. 4) that supports the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, and when the inside of the housing 3 is viewed from the display window 11. Provide a shielding plate large enough to hide the reel. According to this, since the display content of the ratio indicator 69 cannot be confirmed unless the front door 5 is opened, it can be determined whether or not the display content of the ratio indicator 69 is an abnormal value due to a fraudulent act. It can be prevented from being used to confirm whether or not the fraud is detected by the inspector, and the player confirms the display content of the ratio indicator 69 and predicts the set value and the like. Can be prevented.

Further, when the player confirms the ratio display 69 from the front view, the display content can be confirmed, and when the ratio indicator 69 is confirmed from a perspective view, a specific means for hindering the confirmation of the display content may be provided. As the specific means, for example, a polarizing film attached to the substrate case CS, a mesh formed on the substrate case CS, a wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69, and the like. In this case, by forming a wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69 so as to protrude toward the inside of the housing from the upper surface of the substrate case CS, it is more effective to confirm the display content by the perspective. Can be hindered. Further, an auxiliary means for assisting the confirmation of the display content may be provided only when the player confirms the ratio display 69 from the front view. As an auxiliary means, for example, a magnifying lens provided only in a front view portion. Further, the ratio indicator 69 may be arranged at a position where the display of the ratio indicator 69 is difficult to see from a perspective view. For example, when the main control board 63 is mounted inside the housing 3 as shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is provided on the shaft side when the door is opened. According to these, even if the clerk opens the front door 5 in order to eliminate the cause of the error that occurred during the game, the player cannot easily check the display content of the ratio indicator 69, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent confirmation of the display content of the player's ratio display 69.

Further, since the ratio display 69 is housed in the board case CS that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, the five types of game inspection information and the ratio display displayed on the ratio display 69 are displayed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent display of a predetermined abnormality notification by the device 69. In addition, other litable parts other than some litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 (in this embodiment, litable parts DP (dot parts) for each of the ones, tens, and thousandss) are used. The five types of game inspection information are displayed in order, and a display for abnormality notification is performed using the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio display 69. Therefore, the inspector can immediately confirm whether or not the game inspection information in the abnormal state is included in the five types of game inspection information simply by checking the display content of the ratio display 69. For example, if the abnormality notification is not made using the above-mentioned part of the ratio display 69 that can be lit, the inspector will display all five types of game inspection information on the ratio display 69. Without waiting, it is possible to confirm that none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state by confirming some of the above-mentioned littable parts of the ratio indicator 69 immediately after the start of the inspection. In addition, when an abnormality notification is made using the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be lit, the inspector confirms the above-mentioned part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be lit immediately after the start of the inspection. By doing so, it can be confirmed that at least one of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state, and then the five types of game inspection information displayed at the above other litable points of the ratio indicator 69 can be displayed. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the game inspection information in an abnormal state. In this way, the inspector can perform the inspection accurately and efficiently while preventing fraud.

Further, the dot portion in the first place of the ratio display 69 is used for a predetermined abnormality notification display when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 out of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. , The tens digit portion of the ratio display 69 indicates that at least one of the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 and the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 out of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. If this is the case, it is used as a display for a predetermined abnormality notification. As a result, for example, when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is more important than the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2, the inspector displays the dot portion of the first digit of the ratio display 69. By confirming, it is possible to immediately determine whether or not the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 having high importance is in an abnormal state.

In addition, when the total number of games is less than 175,000, the dot portion of the thousands digit (lightable location DP) of the ratio display 69 is lit, so that the inspector can use the total games to calculate the advantageous section ratio (cumulative). It is possible to immediately grasp that the number is less than 175,000. In addition, when the total number of games is less than 175,000, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) obtained by using at least this total number of games may be in an abnormal state due to a small total parameter, and the inspector may be in an abnormal state. The inspection can be performed based on this.

Further, by setting a value larger than the value set in the dot blinking timer for the ratio blinking timer, the blinking interval of some of the above-mentioned litable parts of the ratio indicator 69 is set in the ratio indicator 69. It will be shorter than the blinking interval of other litable parts except for some of the litable parts. That is, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio indicator 69 is faster than the blinking speed of the other littable portion of the ratio indicator 69 except for the part of the littable portion. As a result, the part of the ratio indicator 69 that can be lit is conspicuous, so that the inspector can easily confirm the abnormal state at the part of the part that can be lit. In addition, the blinking of some litable parts and the blinking of other litable parts are completely synchronized (both some litable parts and other litable parts are lit, and both are turned off). This makes it possible to prevent the difficulty of confirming the display content of the ratio indicator 69.

Further, according to the example of FIG. 63, when an RWM error occurs during the inspection, the ratio display 69 for displaying the inspection items such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed to notify the RWM error. The inspector can recognize the occurrence of the RWM error at an early stage.

Further, since the ratio is displayed on the ratio segment of the ratio indicator 69, the inspector can easily determine whether or not fraud is performed based on the value displayed on the ratio segment. Further, according to the first embodiment, the identification segment of the ratio display 69 has a total number of games determined in advance (continuous character ratio (6000 games) and character ratio (6000 games) of 6000, advantageous section ratio. (Cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative) are 175,000), and the flashing display is displayed until the score is reached. Therefore, the inspector can easily recognize whether the display content of the ratio indicator 69 is before reaching a predetermined number or after reaching a predetermined number. In addition, the ratio segment of the ratio display 69 is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus ratio (cumulative). If the calculated value is greater than or equal to the predetermined ratio specified value for each (a value that is judged to be fraudulent and is judged to be fraudulent if it is greater than or equal to the specified ratio value) It blinks and lights up when the ratio is less than the specified value. Therefore, the inspector can easily recognize whether or not the display content of the ratio indicator 69 is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio specified value, that is, whether or not fraud is performed. In addition, the inspector can easily recognize whether or not fraud has been performed by blinking and lighting the ratio segment without knowing the specified ratio value.

When the divisor B is divisor A or less, the ratio (percentage) of the divisor B to the divisor A (the result of multiplying the divisor B by 100 and multiplying it by 100 (B × 100) divided by the divisor A) is the quotient. Is always 100 (decimal notation) or less, and the quotient can be represented by 7 bits, and only the lower 7 bits are calculated as the value of the quotient. Therefore, the calculation load of the ratio (percentage) of the divisor B to the divisor A is suppressed, and the calculation can be performed in a short time.

When the divisor B is divisor A or less, the ratio (percentage) of the divisor B to the divisor A can be calculated as follows. The divisor B is multiplied by 100, the divisor A is subtracted from the result of multiplying by 100 (B × 100), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (B × 100-A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage shall be 0% or more and less than 1%. If it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100-A), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (B × 100-2 × A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage shall be 1% or more and less than 2%. If it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100-2 × A), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (B × 100-3 × A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage shall be 2% or more and less than 3%. By repeating this, the ratio (percentage) of the divisor B to the divisor A can be calculated. In this method, the subtraction process and the determination process can be performed up to 100 times, and the calculation load can be suppressed to some extent. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the percentage of the first embodiment, only the lower 7 bits are calculated as the value of the quotient, so that the calculation load can be further suppressed.

Further, since the totaling by the totaling means 114a is performed after the judgment by the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109 and before the payout process by the payout control means 110, the medal is charged in the middle of the payout process. Even if there is a disconnection and then initialization is involved when the power is restored, for example, if the setting is suddenly changed during the payout of medals, the aggregation process has already been performed. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the medal payout process and then initialization is performed when the power is restored, for example, a setting change may occur unexpectedly during the medal payout process. However, the number of medals paid out can be accurately calculated.

In addition, the information that is aggregated when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment) and the information that is aggregated even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (every game in this embodiment) are aggregated. Waste of processing can be eliminated. Further, according to the first embodiment, the calculation items calculated by satisfying the predetermined conditions (every 400 games in the present embodiment) and the calculation items even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (every game in the present embodiment) are calculated. It is possible to eliminate waste of calculation processing by separating the calculation items from the above, and it is related to the predetermined order in which the display items (1) to (5) are displayed on the ratio display 69 when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Multiple calculation items in a specific order (in the present embodiment, the reverse order of the predetermined order) (effective section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games in the present embodiment) ), Continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative)), and if the predetermined conditions are not met (every game in this embodiment), the first order in the predetermined order is supported. The calculation can be performed efficiently by calculating only the calculation item to be performed (in the present embodiment, the effective section ratio (cumulative)).

Further, after the detection of the RWM error, when the setting change state is entered, the stop of the game is released, and the ratio display 69 is controlled to display normally using the normal lighting mode, so that the inspector can perform the normal display control. Since the ratio indicator 69 is now controlled to display normally using the normal lighting mode, it can be recognized at an early stage that the stop of the game has been released.

According to the first embodiment, since the gap Gp is provided between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged side by side on the one side 63A side of the main control board 63, the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd is provided. One side 63A side of the main control board 63 can be seen through, and the one side 63A of the main control board 63 and the facing surface of the one side 63A of the main control board 63 of the 7-segment display Sd provided with the gap Gp. Even if a fraudulent component Wc such as a fraudulent IC is mounted so as to be hidden between them, the fraudulent component Wc can be easily found by visual recognition from the outside.

Further, by arranging the connection terminal T of each 7-segment display Sd on the side surface on the gap Gp side (see FIG. 6), the connection terminal T of the 7-segment display Sd becomes an obstacle, and one side 63A of the main control board 63 And the surface facing the one side 63A of the ratio display 69 composed of four 7-segment displays Sd, the illegal component Wc such as the illegal IC cannot be mounted, and the illegal component Wc can be mounted. It can be reliably prevented.

<Second Embodiment>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In FIG. 69, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the first embodiment described above are the same or equivalent. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 are not arranged side by side in an aligned state as shown in FIG. 6, but as shown in FIG. 69, between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. The difference from the first embodiment is that four 7-segment displays Sd are arranged side by side in parallel to one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as not to widen the gap Gp.

According to the second embodiment, the hidden space (one-point chain line in FIG. 69) P between the one side 63A of the main control board 63 and the facing surface of each of the 7-segment displays Sd with the one side 63A is invalid. When an attempt is made to mount a part, the dimension of the hidden space P becomes smaller than the vertical or horizontal dimension of the illegal part. Therefore, even if the illegal part is placed in the hidden space P, a part of the illegal part is hidden. It is expected that it will be easier to find the illegal part because it will be easier to protrude from the space P, that is, there is a high possibility that a part of the illegal part will protrude from the area directly under the 7-segment display Sd and become easily visible from the outside. it can. Further, when the connection terminal of each 7-segment display Sd is provided on the side surface other than the gap Gp side, the dimension of the hidden space P is physically smaller than the vertical or horizontal dimension of the illegal part. Unauthorized parts cannot be placed in the hidden space P.

<Third Embodiment>
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In FIG. 70, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the first embodiment described above are the same or equivalent. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the first point is that a transparent cover covering all the 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 is provided as a blocking member for preventing the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. Different from the embodiment.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, when the ratio display 69 is composed of two 7-segment displays Sda for 2-digit display, a gap Gp is opened between the two 7-segment displays Sda and the main Both 7-segment displays Sda are mounted side by side on one side 63A of the control board 63, and a transparent cover Cv shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 70 is provided so as to cover all of the two 7-segment displays Sda. Note that T in FIG. 70 is a connection terminal for the 7-segment display Sda.

Further, a transparent cover Cv covering all of the four 7-segment displays Sd shown in FIG. 6 in the first embodiment may be provided, and as shown in FIG. 69, four 7-segment displays arranged side by side in a staggered manner may be provided. A transparent cover Cv may be provided so as to cover the entire display Sd. Further, it is preferable to perform convex lens processing on the upper position of the gap Gp of such a transparent cover Cv or the transparent substrate case CS, and in this case, the gap Gp can be magnified and visually recognized through the convex lens processed portion. Even if an illegal component is mounted between one surface 63A of the control board 63 and the opposite surface on the 7-segment display Sd side provided with the gap Gp, the illegal component can be easily found.

According to the third embodiment, even if a foreign substance such as a wire, which is a fraudulent member, is inserted into the gap Gp between adjacent 7-segment displays Sda for the purpose of performing some fraud, the transparent cover Cv, which is a blocking member, is used. It is possible to prevent the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

It is not necessary for the transparent cover Cv as a blocking member to cover the entire peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the ratio indicator 69 composed of the two 7-segment displays Sda, and at least shield the side surface where foreign matter is easily inserted into the gap Gp. It does not have to be transparent if the blocking member shields the sides. In short, the blocking member may have a configuration capable of blocking the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp.

<Fourth Embodiment>
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In FIG. 71, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the first embodiment described above are the same or equivalent. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 71 is a view of the other side 63B opposite to the one side 63A of the main control board 63, and constitutes a wiring pattern provided on the other side 63B side of the main control board 63 and a ratio indicator 69. A state in which the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are solder-connected, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the solder connection portion H on the other side 63B side of the main control board 63 (FIG. It is different from the first embodiment in that a cover K for covering a plurality of ○ marks) in 71 is provided.

According to the fourth embodiment, the wiring pattern on the other side 63B side of the main control board 63 and the solder connection portion H between the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are wired from the outside for an illegal purpose. Even if an attempt is made to access by an illegal member such as the above, the solder connection portion H cannot be accessed by the cover K, and the illegal act can be prevented in advance. As shown in FIG. 70, even when the ratio display 69 is composed of two 7-segment displays for 2-digit display, solder between the connection terminals of the two 7-segment displays and the wiring pattern. A cover may be provided to cover the connection portion.

<Fifth Embodiment>
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 72, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 68 relating to the first embodiment described above are the same or equivalent. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 are not arranged in a row, but are arranged in two rows of two each, and the seven-segment displays Sd that are vertically and horizontally adjacent to each other are arranged. It differs from the first embodiment in that a gap Gp is provided between them.

According to the fifth embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment described above can be obtained. As shown in FIG. 72, the four 7-segment displays Sd are not limited to being arranged in two rows of two each, and the seven-segment displays Sd arranged in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction are arranged on the main control board 63. On the other hand, it may be arranged so as to be parallel to the surface 63A and shifted in a direction that does not widen the gap Gp. Further, in order to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into each gap Gp between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged as shown in FIG. 72, a blocking member similar to the transparent cover Cv as shown in FIG. 70 is provided. Further, a solder connection portion between the connection terminals of the four 7-segment displays Sd and the wiring pattern on the other side 63B side of the main control board 63 may be provided by a cover similar to the cover K as in the fourth embodiment. You may cover it.

When four 7-segment displays Sd are arranged and a total of four gaps Gp are provided between the vertically and horizontally adjacent 7-segment displays Sd as shown in FIG. 72, the vertical length of the cross formed by the four gaps Gp is formed. The connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sd is arranged only on the gap Gp side forming the line, or the connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sd is arranged also on the gap Gp side forming the cross-shaped horizontal line formed by the four gap Gp. However, the connection terminal may be obstructed by an illegal component arranged below the 7-segment display Sd so that the illegal component cannot be arranged. Further, the connection terminals of each of the 7-segment display Sd may be arranged on different gaps Gp side, so that the connection terminal of any of the 7-segment display Sd becomes an obstacle and the 7-segment display Sd Unauthorized parts cannot be placed below.

<Sixth Embodiment>
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the gaming machine of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine which is a ball game machine, and the basic electrical configuration and operation are almost the same as those of the first embodiment described above. It is assumed that there is, and in the following, the points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, unlike the slot machine 1 described above, the predetermined aggregation standard and the setting aggregation standard are expressed by the number of prize balls of the bullets or the game (play) time, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 73 in this embodiment. The point that the predetermined aggregation standard and the set aggregation standard are the number of prize balls is significantly different from the first embodiment.

The game information storage means 653 in the present embodiment is composed of an area preset in the RWM 65, and the predetermined total number of prize balls is 6000, and the set total number of prize balls M is 60,000. The data shown in FIG. 73 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of prize balls for 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 (FIG. 73). A 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of the number of prize balls for 6000 prize balls in each period from P1 to P10 in the 1st period to P10 in the 10th period (corresponding to the number of prize balls in P1 to P10). A 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of prize balls since installation or after clearing RWM (corresponding to the total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) ) Is formed. Here, the number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area (for storing the number of prize balls for 6000 prizes in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls from P1 to P10 in FIG. 73), for storing the cumulative value of the number of prize balls for 6000 prizes in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. A 3-byte storage area (corresponding to the cumulative PS prize balls in FIG. 73), and a 4-byte storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls after installation or after clearing the RWM (FIG. 73). (Corresponding to the total number of prize balls for the total number of prizes) has been formed. Here, the number of prize balls for the accessory is the sum of the number of balls paid out by winning the ordinary electric accessory, the number of balls paid out by winning the special electric accessory A, and the number of balls paid out by winning the special electric accessory B. is there.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 stores 2 bytes for storing the number of special electric accessory prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the 1st period P1 to the 10th period P10. Area (corresponding to the number of special electric accessory prize balls from P1 to P10 in FIG. 73), accumulation of the number of special electric accessory prize balls equivalent to the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 A 3-byte storage area for storing values (corresponding to the cumulative number of special electric accessory prize balls of PS in FIG. 73), and the total total number of special electric accessory prize balls since installation or after clearing RWM is stored. A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of special electric accessory prize balls in FIG. 73) is formed. Here, the number of special electric accessory prize balls is the sum of the number of balls paid out by winning the special electric accessory A and the number of balls paid out by winning the special electric accessory B.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 is provided with the ratio of the prize balls in the latest 60000 prize balls (the percentage of the cumulative PS prize balls in FIG. 73 to the cumulative PS prize balls: "Character". A 1-byte storage area for storing a ratio (referred to as "ratio (60,000 prize balls)" (corresponding to the cumulative PS bonus ratio in FIG. 73), and a bonus ratio in the cumulative prize balls (FIG. 73). Percentage of the total number of prize balls for the total number of prize balls: referred to as "the ratio of the total number of prize balls (cumulative)") 1-byte storage area (the total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) (Corresponding to the product ratio) is formed.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game information storage means 653 has a ratio of special electric accessory prize balls in the latest 60000 prize balls (percentage of the number of special electric accessory prize balls of cumulative PS in FIG. 73 to the number of prize balls of cumulative PS). : 1-byte storage area for storing "special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls)" (corresponding to the cumulative PS special electric accessory ratio in FIG. 73), in the cumulative number of prize balls To memorize the special electric accessory ratio (percentage of the total total number of special electric accessory prize balls in FIG. 73 to the total total number of prize balls: referred to as "special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)"). A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative special electric accessory ratio in FIG. 73) is formed.

The size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

However, regarding the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for the accessory, and the number of prize balls for the special electric accessory, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 has a ring buffer structure, and the first period P1 and the first period P1 and the first period P10 are stored. 2nd term P2, 3rd term P3, ..., 9th term P9, 10th term P10, 1st term P1, 2nd term P2, ... The ring pointer is updated every 6000 prize balls while repeating in order, and the value of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer is updated every prize ball as needed after being cleared. In addition, regarding the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for bonuses, and the number of prize balls for special electric prizes, the cumulative PS and the total cumulative total are updated for every 6000 prize balls.

The bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the special electric bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated for each 6000 prize balls.

The above-mentioned number of prize balls, number of prize balls for bonuses, and number of prize balls for special electric prizes correspond to the tabulation items, and the ratio of prize balls (number of prize balls for 60,000 prizes) and the ratio of special electric prize balls (number of prize balls for 60,000 prizes). , The prize ratio (cumulative), and the special electric prize ratio (cumulative) correspond to the calculation items.

The cumulative PS and the total cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for the bonus, and the number of prize balls for the special electric bonus are the information aggregated (for each 6000 prize balls in the present embodiment) when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Is. The number of prize balls, the number of bonus balls, and the number of special electric bonus balls in each period from the 1st period P1 to the 10th period P10 can be determined even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (in this embodiment, each prize is awarded). Sphere) Information to be aggregated. It should be noted that the establishment of the predetermined condition is set for every 6000 prize balls in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the special electric bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. It is displayed on the ratio display (corresponding to "display means") 69 in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, in the predetermined order, the first is the special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), the second is the accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), and the third is the special electric accessory ratio (cumulative total). ), The fourth is the bonus ratio (cumulative).

The bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the special electric bonus ratio (cumulative) are determined when the prescribed conditions are met (book). In the embodiment, it is a calculation item calculated (for every 6000 prize balls). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for every 6000 prize balls in this embodiment), the bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), and the bonus ratio (cumulative total). ), And the special electric accessory ratio (cumulative) are the specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the reverse of the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). It is calculated in the order of). It should be noted that the establishment of the predetermined condition is set for every 60,000 prize balls in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the specific order is the reverse of the predetermined order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the specific order is the same as the predetermined order displayed on the ratio indicator 69. May be good.

Subsequently, a totaling process for totaling the stored contents of the game information storage means 653 shown in FIG. 73 performed by the totaling means 114a in the present embodiment will be described.

The counting means 114a is required for the values of the number of prize balls, the number of bonus balls, and the number of special electric bonus balls for each prize ball in the period corresponding to the ring pointers from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. By adding the number of prize balls according to the above, the values of the number of prize balls, the number of bonus balls, and the number of special electric bonus balls in the relevant period are updated.

Then, the counting means 114a calculates the cumulative number of prize balls from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 for each 6000 prize balls, stores the accumulated value in the cumulative PS prize balls, and stores the cumulative value in the cumulative PS prize balls. The cumulative number of bonus balls from P1 to 10th P10 is calculated and the accumulated value is stored in the cumulative PS bonus balls, and the special electric bonus balls from 1st P1 to 10th P10 are stored. The cumulative number of balls is calculated and the accumulated value is stored in the number of special electric accessory prize balls of the cumulative PS. In addition, the totaling means 114a adds the number of prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of prize balls for each 6000 prize balls. By updating the number of prize balls and adding the number of prize balls for the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the 1st period P1 to the 10th period P10 to the total number of character prize balls, the total total number of character prizes By updating the number of balls and adding the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the 1st period P1 to the 10th period P10 to the total total number of special electric accessory prize balls, the total cumulative total Update the number of special electric accessory prize balls.

The counting means 114a updates the ring pointer after updating the stored contents of the above-mentioned game information storage means 653, which is performed for each 6000 prize balls when the number of prize balls after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 6000. Clear the values of the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for the accessory, and the number of prize balls for the special electric accessory in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to 0. The update of the ring pointer is as follows: 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, 3rd period P3, ..., 9th period P9, 10th period P10, 1st period P1, 2nd period P2, ... The first phase P1 to the tenth phase P10 are repeated in order.

Subsequently, the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic means 114b in the present embodiment based on the stored contents of FIG. 73 will be described.

The calculation means 114b of FIG. 7 has a bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), a special electric bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), a bonus ratio (cumulative), and a special electric combination based on the stored contents of FIG. 73. The object ratio (cumulative) is calculated for each 6000 prize balls.

In the calculation of the bonus ball ratio (60000 prize balls), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the cumulative PS bonus ball number to the cumulative PS prize ball number is calculated, and the special electric bonus ball ratio (60,000 prize balls) is calculated. In the calculation of the number), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of special electric accessory prize balls of the cumulative PS to the number of prize balls of the cumulative PS is calculated. In addition, in the calculation of the bonus ball ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative bonus ball number to the total cumulative prize ball number is calculated, and the special electric bonus ball ratio (cumulative) is calculated. Then, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of special electric accessory prize balls to the total total number of prize balls is calculated. The calculation of each ratio in the sixth embodiment uses the same method as the ratio calculation described in the first embodiment.

Subsequently, the display control means 115 in the present embodiment has a normal display control using the normal lighting mode and a special display control using the special lighting mode based on FIG. 15 for the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69. I do.

In the normal display control using the normal lighting mode, the display control means 115 uses the display control means 115 to display a part of the all litable parts of the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the thousands of digits of the ratio display 69). The predetermined game inspection information out of the four types of game inspection information is displayed using the other litable parts excluding the litable parts DP (dot part) of each of the place and the ones place, and for a certain period of time. By sequentially changing the display target of the ratio display 69 to another game inspection information out of the four types of game inspection information, the four types of game inspection information can be changed to the other lit locations of the ratio display 69. Use to display regularly. Then, the display control means 115 receives at least one of the four types of game inspection information during the display control of the four types of game inspection information using the other litable portion of the ratio display 69. In the case of an abnormal state, a predetermined abnormality notification display is performed using the above-mentioned part of the litable portion of the ratio indicator 69. However, in the present embodiment, the game inspection information includes the inspection data obtained by the calculation means 114b (for example, the special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)) and the information for identifying the inspection data.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the display contents of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information during the normal display control will be described. However, the display content in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 74 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, the percentage (%) is 50 (%), and none of the four types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. If.

The ratio display 69 has (1) special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), (2) accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), and (3) special electric accessory ratio as display items of game inspection information. There are ratios (cumulative) and (4) accessory ratios (cumulative), and these are the litable points DP of the thousands, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69 according to the display method shown in FIG. 74. It is displayed using the parts that can be lit except for the dot part). However, the ratio display number in FIG. 74 indicates the display order.

Specifically, in (1) the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), the "special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prizes)" is placed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio indicator 69. The abbreviation "6b" indicating "number of balls" is displayed, and the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the latest 60000 prize balls is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio indicator 69 (FIG. 73). The ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of special electric accessory prize balls of the cumulative PS to the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls of the cumulative PS in FIG. 73) in the latest 60,000 prize balls is displayed as a two-digit valid value. To.

Further, in (2) Character ratio (60,000 prize balls), the abbreviation indicating "Character ratio (60,000 prize balls)" is shown in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. "7b" is displayed, and the number of bonus balls in the latest 60000 prize balls (the number of bonus balls in the cumulative PS of FIG. 73) is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio indicator 69. ), The effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls of the cumulative PS in FIG. 73) in the latest 60,000 prize balls is displayed.

Furthermore, in (3) Special electric accessory ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "6c" indicating "special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)" in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio indicator 69. Is displayed, and the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the cumulative number of prize balls (the total cumulative total of special electric accessory prize balls in FIG. 73) is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio indicator 69. A two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number) to the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) is displayed.

Further, in (4) Character ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "7c" indicating "character ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69. , Cumulative number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls in Fig. 73) in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segments of the ratio display 69. The two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls in FIG. 73) is displayed.

However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (tens digit and one digit) segment of the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is referred to as the first embodiment. Similarly, 99 (%) is displayed in the lower two digits (tens digit and one digit) segment of the ratio indicator 69.

However, (1) special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), (2) accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), (3) special electric accessory ratio (cumulative), (4) accessory ratio (cumulative) ), As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 74, the lit place DP in the hundreds place is lit. When the game inspection information is not in an abnormal state, the boundary between the identification seg and the ratio seg can be easily grasped by lighting the litable part DP in the hundreds place.

These (1) special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), (2) accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), (3) special electric accessory ratio (cumulative), (4) accessory ratio (cumulative) ) Are displayed in the predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the ratio of special electric accessories (60000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period of time. Subsequently, (2) the accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period of time. Furthermore, (3) the ratio of special electric accessories (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period of time. Further, (4) the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period of time.

Then, the game inspection information of these display items (1) to (4) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, when the number of prize balls corresponding to each has not reached the predetermined number of prize balls, the upper two-digit segment is blinked and displayed, and when each ratio is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio specified value corresponding to each ratio, The last two digits of the segment are blinking.

However, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the display is performed from (1) the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) regardless of the display items when the power is turned off. For example, (2) when the power is turned off while the accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed and the power is turned on again, (1) the special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls) is displayed. Will be done.

The abbreviation is an example and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 73, and may be different between the display items.

Next, the display content of the ratio indicator 69 related to the display for the predetermined abnormality notification during the normal display control will be described.

When the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined value as an abnormal state of the four types of game inspection information, the ratio calculated by the calculation means 114b (in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls) ), The bonus ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative)) may be greater than or equal to the specified ratio value.

When at least one ratio of the ratio display number 2 (special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)) and 3 (role ratio (cumulative)) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, the place where the ratio indicator 69 can be lit. DP (dot part) blinks. In addition, the ratio display number 0 (special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls)), 1 (role ratio (60,000 prize balls)), 2 (special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)), 3 (role ratio) (Cumulative)) When at least one ratio is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, the tens digit litable part DP (dot part) of the ratio indicator 69 blinks. Further, when the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined value, the litable portion DP (dot portion) of the thousands of places of the ratio indicator 69 blinks. However, for example, the blinking interval of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 is the ones digit of the ratio indicator 69 as in the first embodiment. , The tens place and the thousands place, respectively, so that the litable parts other than the litable parts DP are shorter than the blinking interval when the game inspection information is blinked and displayed.

When an RWM error occurs, the display method shown in FIG. 15 is used.

In the sixth embodiment, the sensor detects the passage of the bullet at a specific location, and the aggregation means 114a performs aggregation processing based on the detection of the ball passing through the specific location by the sensor, and the payout control means. The ball payout process is performed based on the detection of the ball that the 110 has passed through a specific location by the sensor. The totaling by the totaling means 114a is performed after the sensor detects the ball that has passed through the specific location and before the payout process by the payout control means 110. As a result, the counting by the counting means 114a is performed after the sensor detects the ball that has passed through the specific location and before the payout process by the payout control means 110. Even if a power failure occurs in the middle of the payout process and then initialization is performed when the power is restored, the aggregation process has already been performed. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs in the middle of the ball payout process and then initialization is performed when the power is restored, the number of ball payouts and the like can be accurately totaled.

The sixth embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls is used as a predetermined totaling standard or a set totaling standard, but the number of prize balls is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the number of launched balls.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and various modifications other than those described above can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the blinking interval of the litable portion DP of each of the ones place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the ratio indicator 69 used for displaying the notification of a predetermined abnormal state is set. The ratio indicator 69 used to display game inspection information is shorter than the blinking interval of the litable parts DP of the ones, tens and thousandss, respectively, but it is limited to this. For example, it may be as follows. Of the littable points DP of the ones digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69, the littable portion DP corresponding to the content of the abnormal state may be constantly lit. In this case, for example, steps S53 and S56 of FIG. 19 may be deleted, steps S657 to S659 of FIG. 42 may be deleted, and steps S784 and S785 of FIG. 48 may be deleted.

The game inspection information given in the first to sixth embodiments described above is an example and is not limited to this, and the content of the abnormal state is also an example and is not limited to this.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are in an abnormal state, the tens and tens of digits of the ratio display 69 and the litable locations DP of each are blinking and displayed, and the second embodiment described above In the embodiment, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 2 and 3 are in an abnormal state, the tens digit and the tens digit and the tens digit DP of the ratio indicator 69 are blinking and displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. For example, when the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 of the first embodiment are in an abnormal state, the litable portion DP of the first digit of the ratio display 69 blinks and displays, and the ratio display numbers 2 and 3 of the sixth embodiment are displayed. When the ratio of is in an abnormal state, the litable portion DP of the first digit of the ratio indicator 69 may be displayed in a blinking manner.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, in the blinking control for the game inspection information, until the number of games or the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined value, the thousands and hundreds of the ratio display 69 can be lit. Of these, the litable parts excluding the litable part DP (dot part) of the thousandth place are blinked, and when the ratio such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is equal to or more than the specified ratio value, the tens place and one of the ratio display 69 Of the littable parts of the tens place and the ones place, the litable parts excluding the litable parts DP (dot part) are blinked, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is some abnormality in the game inspection information, the game inspection information can be displayed on the ratio display 69 except for the thousands, tens, and ones of the lit place DP (dot part). May be displayed by blinking. In this case as well, as in the first and second embodiments, the blinking interval of the litable portion DP (dot portion) of each of the thousands, tens, and ones of the ratio indicator 69 is the ratio indicator 69. The blinking interval of each of the thousands, tens, and ones of the litable parts excluding the DP may be shorter than the blinking interval of the other litable parts.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the littable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the ratio indicator 69 may be composed of full-color LEDs, and the display mode may be color. The abnormality may be notified by changing the brightness. For example, the display color for abnormality notification is determined in advance corresponding to each ratio display number, and the display for abnormality notification is displayed using the color corresponding to the ratio display number in which the ratio is abnormal.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, only one threshold value for the ratio used for abnormality notification is provided for each ratio display number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of levels of threshold values are set. It may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to display the abnormality notification in a different display mode for each stage. For example, the display mode may be different by changing the blinking speed, or the display mode may be different depending on the blinking and lighting. And so on.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the abnormal state is notified by the same display mode at each of the plurality of litable parts for notifying the abnormal state, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the type of inspection data in an abnormal state may be notified by changing the display mode at one litable location. For example, in the one-ranked litable part DP (dot part), the ratio of continuous accessories (cumulative) corresponding to the ratio display number 3 is abnormal when blinking at 0.1 second intervals, and the ratio when blinking at 0.5 second intervals. The bonus ratio (cumulative) corresponding to the display number 4 is abnormal, and both the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are abnormal when the lighting is on.

In the first to sixth embodiments described above, after the power is turned on, the display item (1), the display item (2), the display item (3), the display item (4), the display item (5), and the display item (1) , Display item (2), ... Is performed so that the display is switched in the order of a certain display period, but the display is not limited to this, and for example, the display item in an abnormal state is turned on. Display control may be performed so that the display is preferentially displayed based on the time or when the door is opened, and the display period of the display item in the abnormal state becomes longer than the display period of the display item in the non-abnormal state. The switching timing of the display items may be controlled as described above.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, when an RWM error occurs, all the lightingable parts of the ratio indicator 69 are turned on, but the display is not limited to this, and the setting is changed when the power is turned on. At the time of transition, at the time of setting confirmation, etc., all the litable parts of the ratio display 69 may be turned on for a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to inspect whether or not the portion related to the littable portion including the littable portion of the ratio indicator 69 is out of order.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of aggregation items and a plurality of calculation items have been described, but the plurality of aggregation items and a part of the plurality of calculation items mentioned in each embodiment are modified to be used. Alternatively, it may be modified so as to add another summary item or multiple calculation item to all or part of the plurality of summary items and the plurality of calculation items mentioned in each embodiment. Further, the specific numerical values such as the predetermined aggregation standard and the setting aggregation standard given in each embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the present invention is a gaming machine called a parrot in which the slot machine and the pachinko machine are combined. When the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a pachinko ball as a gaming medium may be adopted. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a video game in which a computer program is executed.

Further, instead of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R in the first embodiment described above, an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT is used, and a plurality of symbols are sequentially displayed on the image display device. It may be configured. Further, the number of rotating reels may be two or more rows, and may be appropriately set to an optimum number according to the mode of the game.

Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 can be read out from the main control board 63 by performing a specific process. Further, the game information stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 can be confirmed from the outside by a display device such as a credit display 45 or a liquid crystal display 27. Further, the RWM 65 of FIGS. 3 and 7 has a structure in which data is not erased even when the power supply of the housing 3 is turned off. Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 has a structure in which the data is not erased by an operation from the outside. Further, when it is determined that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed based on the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7, the game is stopped or the ball output is restricted. Is also possible.

The above contents may be combined as appropriate.

Then, the present invention can be widely applied to gaming machines such as a rotating cylinder type gaming machine and a pachinko gaming machine.

1 ... Slot machine (game machine)
61 ... Main CPU (main control means)
63 ... Main control board 63A ... One side 63B ... The other side 65 ... RWM
69… Ratio indicator (display parts)
Sd, Sda ... 7-segment display (display parts)
Gp ... Gap

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine
A main control board is provided on one side to control the progress of the game, and the main control board is housed in a sealed board case so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.
And a plurality of display parts for displaying the numeric and / or character,
The plurality of display components are arranged side by side on one side of the main control board.
A gap is provided between at least one set of adjacent display parts among the plurality of display parts .
The connection terminals of the plurality of display components are connected to the wiring pattern provided on the main control board.
A gaming machine characterized in that the connection terminals of the at least one set of display components provided with the gap are arranged on the gap side.

Images